• Home
  • Line#
  • Scopes#
  • Navigate#
  • Raw
  • Download
1 /* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2 /*
3  * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4  *
5  * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6  * Copyright 2006-2007	Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7  * Copyright 2007-2010	Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8  * Copyright 2013-2014  Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9  * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10  * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2019 Intel Corporation
11  */
12 
13 #ifndef MAC80211_H
14 #define MAC80211_H
15 
16 #include <linux/bug.h>
17 #include <linux/kernel.h>
18 #include <linux/if_ether.h>
19 #include <linux/skbuff.h>
20 #include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21 #include <net/cfg80211.h>
22 #include <net/codel.h>
23 #include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
24 #include <asm/unaligned.h>
25 
26 /**
27  * DOC: Introduction
28  *
29  * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
30  * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
31  * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
32  * drivers.
33  */
34 
35 /**
36  * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
37  *
38  * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
39  * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
40  * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
41  * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
42  * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
43  * tasklet function.
44  *
45  * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
46  *	 use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
47  */
48 
49 /**
50  * DOC: Warning
51  *
52  * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
53  * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
54  */
55 
56 /**
57  * DOC: Frame format
58  *
59  * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
60  * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
61  * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
62  * hardware.
63  *
64  * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
65  *
66  * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
67  * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
68  *
69  * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
70  * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
71  */
72 
73 /**
74  * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
75  *
76  * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
77  * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
78  * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
79  * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
80  *
81  * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
82  * suspend.
83  *
84  * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
85  *
86  */
87 
88 /**
89  * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
90  *
91  * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
92  * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
93  * between different stations/interfaces.
94  * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
95  * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
96  * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
97  *
98  * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
99  * driver operation.
100  *
101  * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
102  * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
103  * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
104  *
105  * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
106  * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
107  *
108  * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame from a
109  * txq, it calls ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a
110  * queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
111  *
112  * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
113  * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
114  * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
115  * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
116  * ieee80211_return_txq().
117  *
118  * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
119  * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
120  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
121  * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
122  * .release_buffered_frames().
123  * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
124  * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
125  * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
126  */
127 
128 struct device;
129 
130 /**
131  * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
132  *
133  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
134  * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
135  */
136 enum ieee80211_max_queues {
137 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES =		16,
138 	IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP =	BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
139 };
140 
141 #define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE	0xff
142 
143 /**
144  * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
145  * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
146  * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
147  * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
148  * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
149  */
150 enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
151 	IEEE80211_AC_VO		= 0,
152 	IEEE80211_AC_VI		= 1,
153 	IEEE80211_AC_BE		= 2,
154 	IEEE80211_AC_BK		= 3,
155 };
156 
157 /**
158  * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
159  *
160  * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
161  * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
162  *
163  * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
164  * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
165  *	2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
166  * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
167  * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
168  * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
169  * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
170  * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
171  * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
172  */
173 struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
174 	u16 txop;
175 	u16 cw_min;
176 	u16 cw_max;
177 	u8 aifs;
178 	bool acm;
179 	bool uapsd;
180 	bool mu_edca;
181 	struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
182 };
183 
184 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
185 	unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
186 	unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
187 	unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
188 	unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
189 };
190 
191 /**
192  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
193  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
194  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
195  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
196  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
197  *	this is used only with channel switching with CSA
198  * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
199  */
200 enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
201 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH		= BIT(0),
202 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS	= BIT(1),
203 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR		= BIT(2),
204 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL	= BIT(3),
205 	IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH	= BIT(4),
206 };
207 
208 /**
209  * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
210  *
211  * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
212  * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
213  *
214  * @def: the channel definition
215  * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
216  * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
217  *	active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
218  * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
219  *	after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
220  *	this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
221  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
222  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
223  *	sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
224  */
225 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
226 	struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
227 	struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
228 
229 	u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
230 
231 	bool radar_enabled;
232 
233 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
234 };
235 
236 /**
237  * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
238  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
239  *	exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
240  *	needs to be switched from one to the other.
241  * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
242  *      to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
243  *      will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
244  *      from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
245  *      implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
246  *      hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
247  *      will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
248  *      for changes/removal.)
249  */
250 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
251 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
252 	CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
253 };
254 
255 /**
256  * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
257  *
258  * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
259  * needs to switch from one chanctx to another.  The
260  * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
261  * done.
262  *
263  * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
264  * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
265  * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
266  */
267 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
268 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
269 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
270 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
271 };
272 
273 /**
274  * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
275  *
276  * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
277  * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
278  *
279  * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
280  *	also implies a change in the AID.
281  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
282  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
283  * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
284  * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
285  * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
286  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
287  * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
288  *	reason (IBSS and managed mode)
289  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
290  *	new beacon (beaconing modes)
291  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
292  *	enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
293  * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
294  * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
295  * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
296  * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
297  *	that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
298  * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
299  * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
300  * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
301  * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
302  * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
303  * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
304  *	changed
305  * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
306  *	currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
307  * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
308  *	note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
309  *	context had been assigned.
310  * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
311  * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
312  * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
313  *	keep alive) changed.
314  * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
315  * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fime timing reasurement request responder
316  *	functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
317  * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
318  * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
319  *
320  */
321 enum ieee80211_bss_change {
322 	BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC		= 1<<0,
323 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT	= 1<<1,
324 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE	= 1<<2,
325 	BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT		= 1<<3,
326 	BSS_CHANGED_HT			= 1<<4,
327 	BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES		= 1<<5,
328 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT		= 1<<6,
329 	BSS_CHANGED_BSSID		= 1<<7,
330 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON		= 1<<8,
331 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED	= 1<<9,
332 	BSS_CHANGED_CQM			= 1<<10,
333 	BSS_CHANGED_IBSS		= 1<<11,
334 	BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER		= 1<<12,
335 	BSS_CHANGED_QOS			= 1<<13,
336 	BSS_CHANGED_IDLE		= 1<<14,
337 	BSS_CHANGED_SSID		= 1<<15,
338 	BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP	= 1<<16,
339 	BSS_CHANGED_PS			= 1<<17,
340 	BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER		= 1<<18,
341 	BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS		= 1<<19,
342 	BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO		= 1<<20,
343 	BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH		= 1<<21,
344 	BSS_CHANGED_OCB                 = 1<<22,
345 	BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS		= 1<<23,
346 	BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE		= 1<<24,
347 	BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE		= 1<<25,
348 	BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER	= 1<<26,
349 	BSS_CHANGED_TWT			= 1<<27,
350 	BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD		= 1<<28,
351 
352 	/* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
353 };
354 
355 /*
356  * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
357  * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
358  * filtering will be disabled.
359  */
360 #define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
361 
362 /**
363  * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
364  * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
365  * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
366  * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
367  * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
368  *	they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
369  *	once each time the timeout triggers.
370  */
371 enum ieee80211_event_type {
372 	RSSI_EVENT,
373 	MLME_EVENT,
374 	BAR_RX_EVENT,
375 	BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
376 };
377 
378 /**
379  * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
380  * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
381  * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
382  */
383 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
384 	RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
385 	RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
386 };
387 
388 /**
389  * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
390  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
391  */
392 struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
393 	enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
394 };
395 
396 /**
397  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
398  * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
399  * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
400  * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
401  * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
402  */
403 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
404 	AUTH_EVENT,
405 	ASSOC_EVENT,
406 	DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
407 	DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
408 };
409 
410 /**
411  * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
412  * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
413  * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
414  * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
415  */
416 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
417 	MLME_SUCCESS,
418 	MLME_DENIED,
419 	MLME_TIMEOUT,
420 };
421 
422 /**
423  * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
424  * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
425  * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
426  * @reason: the reason code if applicable
427  */
428 struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
429 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
430 	enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
431 	u16 reason;
432 };
433 
434 /**
435  * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
436  * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
437  * @tid: the tid
438  * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
439  */
440 struct ieee80211_ba_event {
441 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
442 	u16 tid;
443 	u16 ssn;
444 };
445 
446 /**
447  * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
448  * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
449  * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
450  * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
451  * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
452  * @u:union holding the fields above
453  */
454 struct ieee80211_event {
455 	enum ieee80211_event_type type;
456 	union {
457 		struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
458 		struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
459 		struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
460 	} u;
461 };
462 
463 /**
464  * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
465  *
466  * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
467  *
468  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
469  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
470  */
471 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
472 	u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
473 	u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
474 };
475 
476 /**
477  * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
478  *
479  * @lci: LCI subelement content
480  * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
481  * @lci_len: LCI data length
482  * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
483  */
484 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
485 	const u8 *lci;
486 	const u8 *civicloc;
487 	size_t lci_len;
488 	size_t civicloc_len;
489 };
490 
491 /**
492  * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
493  *
494  * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
495  * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
496  *
497  * @bss_color: 6-bit value to mark inter-BSS frame, if BSS supports HE
498  * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
499  * @multi_sta_back_32bit: supports BA bitmap of 32-bits in Multi-STA BACK
500  * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
501  * @ack_enabled: indicates support to receive a multi-TID that solicits either
502  *	ACK, BACK or both
503  * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
504  * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
505  * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
506  * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
507  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
508  * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
509  *	mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
510  * @assoc: association status
511  * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
512  *	or not
513  * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
514  * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
515  * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
516  * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
517  * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
518  * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
519  *	valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
520  *	with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
521  * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
522  *	as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
523  *	HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
524  *	only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
525  *	association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
526  *	%BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
527  * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
528  *	the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
529  *	(see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
530  * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
531  *	is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
532  *	IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
533  *	by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
534  *	guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
535  * @beacon_int: beacon interval
536  * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
537  * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
538  *	index into the rate table configured by the driver in
539  *	the current band.
540  * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
541  * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
542  * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
543  * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
544  * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
545  *	configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
546  * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
547  * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
548  *	This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
549  *	Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
550  *	be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
551  * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
552  *	implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
553  *	cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
554  *	relation to the newly configured threshold.
555  * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
556  *	implies disabled.  This is an alternative mechanism to the single
557  *	threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
558  * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
559  * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
560  * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
561  *	may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
562  *	The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
563  *	to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
564  * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
565  *	may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
566  *	array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
567  * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
568  * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
569  *	hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
570  *	your driver/device needs to do.
571  * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
572  *	offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
573  * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
574  * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
575  * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
576  * @txpower: TX power in dBm
577  * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
578  *	Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
579  *	TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
580  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
581  *	userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
582  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
583  * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
584  * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
585  *	to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
586  *	if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
587  * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
588  *	transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
589  *	In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
590  *	a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
591  * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
592  *	protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
593  *	station.
594  * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
595  *	responder functionality.
596  * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
597  * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
598  * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
599  * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
600  * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
601  * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
602  *	nontransmitted BSSIDs
603  * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
604  *	in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
605  * @he_operation: HE operation information of the AP we are connected to
606  * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
607  */
608 struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
609 	const u8 *bssid;
610 	u8 bss_color;
611 	u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
612 	bool multi_sta_back_32bit;
613 	bool uora_exists;
614 	bool ack_enabled;
615 	u8 uora_ocw_range;
616 	u16 frame_time_rts_th;
617 	bool he_support;
618 	bool twt_requester;
619 	bool twt_responder;
620 	/* association related data */
621 	bool assoc, ibss_joined;
622 	bool ibss_creator;
623 	u16 aid;
624 	/* erp related data */
625 	bool use_cts_prot;
626 	bool use_short_preamble;
627 	bool use_short_slot;
628 	bool enable_beacon;
629 	u8 dtim_period;
630 	u16 beacon_int;
631 	u16 assoc_capability;
632 	u64 sync_tsf;
633 	u32 sync_device_ts;
634 	u8 sync_dtim_count;
635 	u32 basic_rates;
636 	struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
637 	int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
638 	u16 ht_operation_mode;
639 	s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
640 	u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
641 	s32 cqm_rssi_low;
642 	s32 cqm_rssi_high;
643 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
644 	struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
645 	__be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
646 	int arp_addr_cnt;
647 	bool qos;
648 	bool idle;
649 	bool ps;
650 	u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
651 	size_t ssid_len;
652 	bool hidden_ssid;
653 	int txpower;
654 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
655 	struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
656 	bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
657 	u16 max_idle_period;
658 	bool protected_keep_alive;
659 	bool ftm_responder;
660 	struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
661 	/* Multiple BSSID data */
662 	bool nontransmitted;
663 	u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
664 	u8 bssid_index;
665 	u8 bssid_indicator;
666 	bool ema_ap;
667 	u8 profile_periodicity;
668 	struct ieee80211_he_operation he_operation;
669 	struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
670 };
671 
672 /**
673  * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
674  *
675  * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
676  *
677  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
678  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
679  *	number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
680  *	number and increasing the sequence number only when the
681  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
682  *	assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
683  *	for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
684  *	that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
685  *	If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
686  *	assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
687  *	802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
688  *	beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
689  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
690  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
691  *	station
692  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
693  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
694  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
695  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
696  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
697  *	because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
698  *	avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
699  *	firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
700  *	went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
701  *	the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
702  *	that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
703  *	since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
704  *	hardware queue.
705  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
706  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
707  * 	is for the whole aggregation.
708  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
709  * 	so consider using block ack request (BAR).
710  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
711  *	set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
712  *	be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
713  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
714  *	that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
715  *	off-channel operation.
716  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
717  *	used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
718  *	it can be sent out.
719  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
720  *	used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
721  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
722  *	used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
723  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
724  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
725  *	be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
726  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
727  *	transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
728  *	by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
729  *	queue gets full.
730  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
731  *	after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
732  *	be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
733  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
734  *	code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
735  *	should kick the MLME state machine.
736  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
737  *	MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
738  *	status to user space)
739  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
740  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
741  *	frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
742  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
743  *	the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
744  *	in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
745  *	handled properly by the device.
746  * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
747  *	testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
748  *	TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
749  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
750  *	This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
751  *	frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
752  * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
753  *	when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
754  *	an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
755  *	the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
756  *	PS-Poll responses.
757  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
758  *	This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
759  *	the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
760  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
761  *	would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
762  *	monitor injection).
763  * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
764  *	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
765  *	any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
766  *	This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
767  *	behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
768  *
769  * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
770  *	 forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
771  */
772 enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
773 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS		= BIT(0),
774 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ		= BIT(1),
775 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK			= BIT(2),
776 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT		= BIT(3),
777 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT		= BIT(4),
778 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM	= BIT(5),
779 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU			= BIT(6),
780 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED		= BIT(7),
781 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED		= BIT(8),
782 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK			= BIT(9),
783 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU			= BIT(10),
784 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK		= BIT(11),
785 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE	= BIT(12),
786 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK	= BIT(13),
787 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING	= BIT(14),
788 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED		= BIT(15),
789 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT		= BIT(16),
790 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER		= BIT(17),
791 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES		= BIT(18),
792 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION	= BIT(19),
793 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX		= BIT(20),
794 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX	= BIT(21),
795 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC			= BIT(22),
796 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC			= BIT(23) | BIT(24),
797 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN		= BIT(25),
798 	IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE	= BIT(26),
799 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE		= BIT(27),
800 	IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP		= BIT(28),
801 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE		= BIT(29),
802 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG		= BIT(30),
803 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED	= BIT(31),
804 };
805 
806 #define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT		23
807 
808 /**
809  * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
810  *
811  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
812  *	protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
813  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
814  *	frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
815  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
816  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
817  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
818  * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
819  *
820  * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
821  */
822 enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
823 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO	= BIT(0),
824 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE		= BIT(1),
825 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT		= BIT(2),
826 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU			= BIT(3),
827 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT		= BIT(4),
828 	IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP	= BIT(5),
829 };
830 
831 /*
832  * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
833  * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
834  */
835 #define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK |		      \
836 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT |    \
837 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU |	      \
838 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED |	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK |		      \
839 	IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK |	      \
840 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER |    \
841 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC |		      \
842 	IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
843 
844 /**
845  * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
846  *	Rate Control algorithm.
847  *
848  * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
849  * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
850  *
851  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
852  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
853  *	This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
854  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
855  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
856  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
857  *	into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
858  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
859  *	Greenfield mode.
860  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
861  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
862  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
863  *	(80+80 isn't supported yet)
864  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
865  *	adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
866  *	NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
867  * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
868  */
869 enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
870 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS		= BIT(0),
871 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT		= BIT(1),
872 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE	= BIT(2),
873 
874 	/* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
875 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS			= BIT(3),
876 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD		= BIT(4),
877 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(5),
878 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA		= BIT(6),
879 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI		= BIT(7),
880 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS			= BIT(8),
881 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(9),
882 	IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH		= BIT(10),
883 };
884 
885 
886 /* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
887 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
888 
889 /* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
890 #define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
891 
892 /* maximum number of rate stages */
893 #define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES	4
894 
895 /* maximum number of rate table entries */
896 #define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE	4
897 
898 /**
899  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
900  *
901  * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
902  * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
903  * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
904  *
905  * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
906  * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
907  *
908  * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
909  * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
910  *
911  * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
912  * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
913  * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
914  * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
915  * information::
916  *
917  *    { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
918  *
919  * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
920  * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
921  * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
922  * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
923  * information should then contain::
924  *
925  *   { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
926  *
927  * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
928  * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
929  */
930 struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
931 	s8 idx;
932 	u16 count:5,
933 	    flags:11;
934 } __packed;
935 
936 #define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY		31
937 
ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate,u8 mcs,u8 nss)938 static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
939 					  u8 mcs, u8 nss)
940 {
941 	WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
942 	WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
943 	rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
944 }
945 
946 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)947 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
948 {
949 	return rate->idx & 0xF;
950 }
951 
952 static inline u8
ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate * rate)953 ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
954 {
955 	return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
956 }
957 
958 /**
959  * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
960  *
961  * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
962  *  (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
963  *  (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
964  *  (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
965  *
966  * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
967  * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
968  * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
969  * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
970  * @control: union part for control data
971  * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
972  * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
973  * @control.use_rts: use RTS
974  * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
975  * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
976  * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
977  * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
978  * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
979  * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
980  * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
981  * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
982  * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
983  * @pad: padding
984  * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
985  * @status: union part for status data
986  * @status.rates: attempted rates
987  * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
988  * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
989  * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
990  * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
991  * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission
992  * @status.is_valid_ack_signal: ACK signal is valid
993  * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
994  * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
995  * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
996  * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
997  * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
998  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
999  * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
1000  * 	relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
1001  * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
1002  */
1003 struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1004 	/* common information */
1005 	u32 flags;
1006 	u8 band;
1007 
1008 	u8 hw_queue;
1009 
1010 	u16 ack_frame_id;
1011 
1012 	union {
1013 		struct {
1014 			union {
1015 				/* rate control */
1016 				struct {
1017 					struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1018 						IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1019 					s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1020 					u8 use_rts:1;
1021 					u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1022 					u8 short_preamble:1;
1023 					u8 skip_table:1;
1024 					/* 2 bytes free */
1025 				};
1026 				/* only needed before rate control */
1027 				unsigned long jiffies;
1028 			};
1029 			/* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1030 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1031 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1032 			u32 flags;
1033 			codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1034 		} control;
1035 		struct {
1036 			u64 cookie;
1037 		} ack;
1038 		struct {
1039 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1040 			s32 ack_signal;
1041 			u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1042 			u8 ampdu_len;
1043 			u8 antenna;
1044 			u16 tx_time;
1045 			bool is_valid_ack_signal;
1046 			void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
1047 		} status;
1048 		struct {
1049 			struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1050 				IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1051 			u8 pad[4];
1052 
1053 			void *rate_driver_data[
1054 				IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1055 		};
1056 		void *driver_data[
1057 			IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1058 	};
1059 };
1060 
1061 /**
1062  * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx staus info for rate control
1063  *
1064  * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1065  * @info: Basic tx status information
1066  * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1067  * @rate: The TX rate that was used when sending the packet
1068  */
1069 struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1070 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1071 	struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1072 	struct sk_buff *skb;
1073 	struct rate_info *rate;
1074 };
1075 
1076 /**
1077  * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1078  *
1079  * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1080  * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1081  * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1082  *
1083  * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1084  * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1085  * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1086  * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1087  */
1088 struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1089 	const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1090 	size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1091 	const u8 *common_ies;
1092 	size_t common_ie_len;
1093 };
1094 
1095 
IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff * skb)1096 static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1097 {
1098 	return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1099 }
1100 
IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff * skb)1101 static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1102 {
1103 	return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1104 }
1105 
1106 /**
1107  * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1108  *
1109  * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1110  *
1111  * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1112  * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1113  * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1114  * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1115  *
1116  * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1117  *	 info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1118  *	 instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1119  */
1120 static inline void
ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)1121 ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1122 {
1123 	int i;
1124 
1125 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1126 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1127 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1128 		     offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1129 	BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1130 	/* clear the rate counts */
1131 	for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1132 		info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1133 
1134 	BUILD_BUG_ON(
1135 	    offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1136 	memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1137 	       sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1138 	       offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1139 }
1140 
1141 
1142 /**
1143  * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1144  *
1145  * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1146  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1147  *	Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1148  * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1149  * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1150  *	verification has been done by the hardware.
1151  * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1152  *	If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1153  *	hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1154  * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1155  *	flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1156  *	Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1157  *	is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1158  * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1159  *	de-duplication by itself.
1160  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1161  *	the frame.
1162  * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1163  *	the frame.
1164  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1165  *	field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1166  *	was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1167  *	merging.
1168  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1169  *	field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1170  *	(including FCS) was received.
1171  * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1172  *	field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1173  * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1174  *	Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1175  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1176  *	number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1177  *	each A-MPDU
1178  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1179  *	subframes of a single A-MPDU
1180  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1181  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1182  *	on this subframe
1183  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1184  *	is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1185  * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1186  *	done by the hardware
1187  * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1188  *	processing it in any regular way.
1189  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1190  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1191  * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1192  *	monitor interfaces.
1193  *	This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1194  *	them for sniffing purposes.
1195  * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1196  *	subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1197  *	All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1198  *	if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1199  *	the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1200  *	deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1201  *	subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1202  *	either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1203  *	interleaved with other frames.
1204  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1205  *	radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1206  *	the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1207  * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1208  *	This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1209  *	the first subframe.
1210  * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1211  *	be done in the hardware.
1212  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1213  *	frame
1214  * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1215  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1216  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1217  *
1218  *	 - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1219  *	 - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1220  *	 - DATA3_CODING
1221  *	 - DATA5_GI
1222  *	 - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1223  *	 - DATA6_NSTS
1224  *	 - DATA3_STBC
1225  *
1226  *	from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1227  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1228  *	(&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1229  * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1230  * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1231  *	the "0-length PSDU" field included there.  The value for it is
1232  *	in &struct ieee80211_rx_status.  Note that if this value isn't
1233  *	known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1234  */
1235 enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1236 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR		= BIT(0),
1237 	RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED		= BIT(1),
1238 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START	= BIT(2),
1239 	RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(3),
1240 	RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED		= BIT(4),
1241 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC		= BIT(5),
1242 	RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC 	= BIT(6),
1243 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START		= BIT(7),
1244 	RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL		= BIT(8),
1245 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS		= BIT(9),
1246 	RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED		= BIT(10),
1247 	RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED		= BIT(11),
1248 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN	= BIT(12),
1249 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST		= BIT(13),
1250 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR	= BIT(14),
1251 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN	= BIT(15),
1252 	RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END		= BIT(16),
1253 	RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR		= BIT(17),
1254 	RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR		= BIT(18),
1255 	RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE		= BIT(19),
1256 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA	= BIT(20),
1257 	RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED		= BIT(21),
1258 	RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN		= BIT(22),
1259 	RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED		= BIT(23),
1260 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT		= BIT(24),
1261 	RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN	= BIT(25),
1262 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE		= BIT(26),
1263 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU		= BIT(27),
1264 	RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG		= BIT(28),
1265 	RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU			= BIT(29),
1266 };
1267 
1268 /**
1269  * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1270  *
1271  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1272  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1273  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1274  *	if the driver fills this value it should add
1275  *	%IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1276  *	to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1277  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1278  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1279  * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1280  */
1281 enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1282 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE		= BIT(0),
1283 	RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI		= BIT(2),
1284 	RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF		= BIT(3),
1285 	RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK		= BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1286 	RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC		= BIT(6),
1287 	RX_ENC_FLAG_BF			= BIT(7),
1288 };
1289 
1290 #define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT		4
1291 
1292 enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1293 	RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1294 	RX_ENC_HT,
1295 	RX_ENC_VHT,
1296 	RX_ENC_HE,
1297 };
1298 
1299 /**
1300  * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1301  *
1302  * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1303  * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1304  * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1305  *
1306  * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1307  * 	(TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1308  * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1309  *	needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1310  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1311  *	it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1312  * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1313  * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1314  *	This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1315  *	for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1316  * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1317  *	unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1318  *	@IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1319  * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1320  *	values were filled.
1321  * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1322  *	support dB or unspecified units)
1323  * @antenna: antenna used
1324  * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1325  *	HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1326  * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1327  * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1328  * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1329  * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1330  * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1331  * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1332  * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1333  * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1334  * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1335  * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1336  *	each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1337  * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1338  * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1339  */
1340 struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1341 	u64 mactime;
1342 	u64 boottime_ns;
1343 	u32 device_timestamp;
1344 	u32 ampdu_reference;
1345 	u32 flag;
1346 	u16 freq;
1347 	u8 enc_flags;
1348 	u8 encoding:2, bw:3, he_ru:3;
1349 	u8 he_gi:2, he_dcm:1;
1350 	u8 rate_idx;
1351 	u8 nss;
1352 	u8 rx_flags;
1353 	u8 band;
1354 	u8 antenna;
1355 	s8 signal;
1356 	u8 chains;
1357 	s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1358 	u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1359 	u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1360 };
1361 
1362 /**
1363  * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1364  * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1365  *	(this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1366  *	 bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1367  * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1368  *	alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1369  *	description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1370  *	Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1371  * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1372  * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1373  * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1374  *	then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1375  *	@data field.
1376  * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1377  *	the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1378  *	length
1379  * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1380  *
1381  * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1382  * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1383  * data.
1384  */
1385 struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1386 	u32 present;
1387 	u8 align;
1388 	u8 oui[3];
1389 	u8 subns;
1390 	u8 pad;
1391 	u16 len;
1392 	u8 data[];
1393 } __packed;
1394 
1395 /**
1396  * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1397  *
1398  * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1399  *
1400  * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1401  *	to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1402  *	or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1403  * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1404  *	This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1405  *	meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1406  *	transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1407  *	Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1408  *	driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1409  *	for more.
1410  * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1411  *	the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1412  *	may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1413  *	be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1414  *	it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1415  * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1416  *	operating channel.
1417  */
1418 enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1419 	IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR		= (1<<0),
1420 	IEEE80211_CONF_PS		= (1<<1),
1421 	IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE		= (1<<2),
1422 	IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL	= (1<<3),
1423 };
1424 
1425 
1426 /**
1427  * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1428  *
1429  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1430  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1431  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1432  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1433  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1434  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1435  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1436  * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1437  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1438  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1439  */
1440 enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1441 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS		= BIT(1),
1442 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL	= BIT(2),
1443 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR		= BIT(3),
1444 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS		= BIT(4),
1445 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER		= BIT(5),
1446 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL		= BIT(6),
1447 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS	= BIT(7),
1448 	IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE		= BIT(8),
1449 };
1450 
1451 /**
1452  * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1453  *
1454  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1455  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1456  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1457  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1458  * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1459  */
1460 enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1461 	IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1462 	IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1463 	IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1464 	IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1465 
1466 	/* keep last */
1467 	IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1468 };
1469 
1470 /**
1471  * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1472  *
1473  * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1474  *
1475  * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1476  *
1477  * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1478  * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1479  *	in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1480  *	has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1481  * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1482  *	powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1483  *	the CONF_PS flag is set.
1484  *
1485  * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1486  *	value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1487  *
1488  * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1489  * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1490  *
1491  * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1492  *	(a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1493  *	but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1494  * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1495  *	frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1496  *	number of transmissions not the number of retries
1497  *
1498  * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1499  *	%IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1500  *	configured for an HT channel.
1501  *	Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1502  *	otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1503  */
1504 struct ieee80211_conf {
1505 	u32 flags;
1506 	int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1507 
1508 	u16 listen_interval;
1509 	u8 ps_dtim_period;
1510 
1511 	u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1512 
1513 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1514 	bool radar_enabled;
1515 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1516 };
1517 
1518 /**
1519  * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1520  *
1521  * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1522  * operation.
1523  *
1524  * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1525  *	Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1526  *	announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1527  *	the driver passed into mac80211.
1528  * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1529  *	rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1530  * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1531  *	scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1532  * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1533  * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1534  * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1535   *	current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1536   *	channel, expressed in TU.
1537  */
1538 struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1539 	u64 timestamp;
1540 	u32 device_timestamp;
1541 	bool block_tx;
1542 	struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1543 	u8 count;
1544 	u32 delay;
1545 };
1546 
1547 /**
1548  * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1549  *
1550  * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1551  *	on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1552  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1553  *	monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1554  *	connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1555  *	provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1556  * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1557  *	interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1558  *	but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1559  *	only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1560  * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1561  *	and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1562  *	this is not pure P2P vif.
1563  */
1564 enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1565 	IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER		= BIT(0),
1566 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI		= BIT(1),
1567 	IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD		= BIT(2),
1568 	IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE		= BIT(3),
1569 };
1570 
1571 /**
1572  * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1573  *
1574  * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1575  * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1576  *
1577  * @type: type of this virtual interface
1578  * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1579  *	or the BSS we're associated to
1580  * @addr: address of this interface
1581  * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1582  *	interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1583  * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1584  *	write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1585  *	for read access.
1586  * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1587  * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1588  *	these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1589  *	or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1590  *	at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1591  * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1592  * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1593  * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1594  *	when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1595  *	path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1596  *	be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1597  *	processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1598  * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1599  *	interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1600  *	monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1601  * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1602  *	interface.
1603  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1604  *	sizeof(void \*).
1605  * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1606  * @txqs_stopped: per AC flag to indicate that intermediate TXQs are stopped,
1607  *	protected by fq->lock.
1608  */
1609 struct ieee80211_vif {
1610 	enum nl80211_iftype type;
1611 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1612 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1613 	bool p2p;
1614 	bool csa_active;
1615 	bool mu_mimo_owner;
1616 
1617 	u8 cab_queue;
1618 	u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1619 
1620 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1621 
1622 	struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1623 
1624 	u32 driver_flags;
1625 
1626 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1627 	struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1628 #endif
1629 
1630 	unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1631 
1632 	bool txqs_stopped[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1633 
1634 	/* must be last */
1635 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1636 };
1637 
ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)1638 static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1639 {
1640 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1641 	return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1642 #endif
1643 	return false;
1644 }
1645 
1646 /**
1647  * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1648  * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1649  *
1650  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1651  * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1652  *
1653  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1654  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1655  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1656  */
1657 struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1658 
1659 /**
1660  * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1661  * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1662  *
1663  * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1664  * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1665  *
1666  * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1667  * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1668  * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1669  */
1670 struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1671 
1672 /**
1673  * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1674  *
1675  * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1676  * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1677  *
1678  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1679  *	driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1680  *	particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1681  *	will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1682  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1683  *	the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1684  *	generation in software.
1685  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1686  *	that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1687  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1688  *	CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1689  *	(MFP) to be done in software.
1690  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1691  *	if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1692  *	itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1693  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1694  *	not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1695  *	MIC.
1696  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1697  *	management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1698  *	crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1699  *	properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1700  *	fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1701  *	RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1702  *	%IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1703  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1704  *	driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1705  *	only for managment frames (MFP).
1706  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1707  *	driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1708  *	be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1709  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1710  *	a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1711  *	@IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1712  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
1713  * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
1714  *	for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
1715  *	generation only
1716  */
1717 enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1718 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT	= BIT(0),
1719 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV		= BIT(1),
1720 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC	= BIT(2),
1721 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE		= BIT(3),
1722 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX		= BIT(4),
1723 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE		= BIT(5),
1724 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT		= BIT(6),
1725 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM	= BIT(7),
1726 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE	= BIT(8),
1727 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX		= BIT(9),
1728 	IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE	= BIT(10),
1729 };
1730 
1731 /**
1732  * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1733  *
1734  * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1735  * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1736  *
1737  * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1738  *	wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1739  *	encrypted in hardware.
1740  * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1741  * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1742  *	needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1743  * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1744  * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1745  * @keylen: key material length
1746  * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1747  * 	data block:
1748  * 	- Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1749  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1750  * 	- Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1751  * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1752  * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1753  */
1754 struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1755 	atomic64_t tx_pn;
1756 	u32 cipher;
1757 	u8 icv_len;
1758 	u8 iv_len;
1759 	u8 hw_key_idx;
1760 	s8 keyidx;
1761 	u16 flags;
1762 	u8 keylen;
1763 	u8 key[0];
1764 };
1765 
1766 #define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN	16
1767 
1768 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1769 #define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1770 
1771 /**
1772  * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1773  *
1774  * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1775  * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1776  *	reverse order than in packet)
1777  * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1778  *	reverse order than in packet)
1779  * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1780  *	reverse order than in packet)
1781  * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1782  *	reverse order than in packet)
1783  * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1784  */
1785 struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1786 	union {
1787 		struct {
1788 			u32 iv32;
1789 			u16 iv16;
1790 		} tkip;
1791 		struct {
1792 			u8 pn[6];
1793 		} ccmp;
1794 		struct {
1795 			u8 pn[6];
1796 		} aes_cmac;
1797 		struct {
1798 			u8 pn[6];
1799 		} aes_gmac;
1800 		struct {
1801 			u8 pn[6];
1802 		} gcmp;
1803 		struct {
1804 			u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1805 			u8 seq_len;
1806 		} hw;
1807 	};
1808 };
1809 
1810 /**
1811  * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1812  *
1813  * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1814  * the secure packet crypto handling.
1815  *
1816  * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1817  * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1818  * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1819  * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1820  * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1821  * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1822  * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1823  * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1824  *     key_idx value calculation:
1825  *      (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1826  * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1827  */
1828 struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1829 	u32 cipher;
1830 	u16 iftype;
1831 	u8 hdr_len;
1832 	u8 pn_len;
1833 	u8 pn_off;
1834 	u8 key_idx_off;
1835 	u8 key_idx_mask;
1836 	u8 key_idx_shift;
1837 	u8 mic_len;
1838 };
1839 
1840 /**
1841  * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1842  *
1843  * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1844  * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1845  *
1846  * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1847  * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1848  */
1849 enum set_key_cmd {
1850 	SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1851 };
1852 
1853 /**
1854  * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1855  *
1856  * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1857  *	this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1858  * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1859  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1860  * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1861  * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1862  */
1863 enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1864 	/* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1865 	IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1866 	IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1867 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1868 	IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1869 	IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1870 };
1871 
1872 /**
1873  * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1874  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1875  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1876  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1877  * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1878  *	(including 80+80 MHz)
1879  *
1880  * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1881  *	correctly, the values must be sorted.
1882  */
1883 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1884 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1885 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1886 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1887 	IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1888 };
1889 
1890 /**
1891  * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1892  *
1893  * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1894  * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1895  *	Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1896  */
1897 struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1898 	struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1899 	struct {
1900 		s8 idx;
1901 		u8 count;
1902 		u8 count_cts;
1903 		u8 count_rts;
1904 		u16 flags;
1905 	} rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1906 };
1907 
1908 /**
1909  * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
1910  *
1911  * Used to configure txpower for station.
1912  *
1913  * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
1914  *	to the STA.
1915  * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
1916  *	will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
1917  *	%type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
1918  *	NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
1919  *	per peer TPC.
1920  */
1921 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
1922 	s16 power;
1923 	enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
1924 };
1925 
1926 /**
1927  * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1928  *
1929  * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1930  * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1931  * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1932  * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1933  * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
1934  * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
1935  *
1936  * @addr: MAC address
1937  * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
1938  * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
1939  * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1940  * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1941  * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
1942  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1943  *	that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1944  *	Can be modified by driver.
1945  * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1946  *	otherwise always false)
1947  * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1948  *	sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
1949  * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1950  *	if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1951  *	IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
1952  * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
1953  * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
1954  * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1955  *	station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1956  *	notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1957  *	the station moves to associated state.
1958  * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
1959  * @rates: rate control selection table
1960  * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
1961  * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1962  *	valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
1963  * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
1964  * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1965  *	A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1966  *	unlimited.
1967  * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
1968  * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
1969  * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
1970  * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction); note that
1971  *	the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS) is used for non-data frames
1972  */
1973 struct ieee80211_sta {
1974 	u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1975 	u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1976 	u16 aid;
1977 	struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
1978 	struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
1979 	struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
1980 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
1981 	bool wme;
1982 	u8 uapsd_queues;
1983 	u8 max_sp;
1984 	u8 rx_nss;
1985 	enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
1986 	enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1987 	struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
1988 	bool tdls;
1989 	bool tdls_initiator;
1990 	bool mfp;
1991 	u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
1992 
1993 	/**
1994 	 * @max_amsdu_len:
1995 	 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
1996 	 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
1997 	 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1998 	 *
1999 	 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2000 	 *   A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2001 	 * * If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2002 	 *   size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2003 	 *
2004 	 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2005 	 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2006 	 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2007 	 */
2008 	u16 max_amsdu_len;
2009 	bool support_p2p_ps;
2010 	u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2011 	u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2012 	struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2013 
2014 	struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2015 
2016 	/* must be last */
2017 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2018 };
2019 
2020 /**
2021  * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2022  *
2023  * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2024  * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2025  *
2026  * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2027  * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2028  */
2029 enum sta_notify_cmd {
2030 	STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2031 };
2032 
2033 /**
2034  * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2035  *
2036  * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2037  * 	it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2038  */
2039 struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2040 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2041 };
2042 
2043 /**
2044  * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2045  *
2046  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2047  * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2048  * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2049  *	%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2050  * @ac: the AC for this queue
2051  * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2052  *
2053  * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2054  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2055  */
2056 struct ieee80211_txq {
2057 	struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2058 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2059 	u8 tid;
2060 	u8 ac;
2061 
2062 	/* must be last */
2063 	u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2064 };
2065 
2066 /**
2067  * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2068  *
2069  * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2070  * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2071  * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2072  * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2073  * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2074  *
2075  * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2076  *	The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2077  *	controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2078  *	should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2079  *	will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2080  *	algorithm.
2081  *	Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2082  *	callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2083  *	the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2084  *	@use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2085  *	timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2086  *	CCK frames.
2087  *
2088  * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2089  *	Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2090  *	the FCS at the end.
2091  *
2092  * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2093  *	Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2094  *	for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2095  *	rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2096  *	to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2097  *	multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2098  *	the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2099  *
2100  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2101  *	Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2102  *	expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2103  *	If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2104  *
2105  * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2106  *	Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2107  *	one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2108  *	between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2109  *
2110  * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2111  * 	Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2112  * 	Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2113  *
2114  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2115  *	Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2116  *
2117  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2118  *	Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2119  *
2120  * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2121  *	Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2122  *	stack support for dynamic PS.
2123  *
2124  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2125  *	Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2126  *
2127  * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2128  *	Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2129  *
2130  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2131  *	Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2132  *	the stack.
2133  *
2134  * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2135  *	The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2136  *	periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2137  *
2138  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2139  *	This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2140  *	dtim_period).
2141  *
2142  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2143  *	per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2144  *	the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2145  *	to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2146  *	possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2147  *	only in that case.
2148  *
2149  * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2150  *	autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2151  *	this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2152  *	stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2153  *	Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2154  *	the PS mode of connected stations.
2155  *
2156  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2157  *	setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2158  *	software.
2159  *
2160  * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2161  *	a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2162  *	active interfaces.
2163  *
2164  * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2165  *	be created.  It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2166  *	desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2167  *
2168  * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2169  *	crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2170  *	try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2171  *	the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2172  *	supported cipher suites.
2173  *
2174  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2175  *	this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2176  *	for frames.
2177  *
2178  * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2179  *	queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2180  *	for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2181  *	control for more details.
2182  *
2183  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2184  *	selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2185  *
2186  * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2187  *	P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2188  *	is supported.
2189  *
2190  * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2191  *	only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2192  *
2193  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2194  *	and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2195  *	using aggregation for such frames.)
2196  *
2197  * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2198  *	for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2199  *	is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2200  *	CSA frame.
2201  *
2202  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2203  *	or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2204  *
2205  * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2206  *	in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2207  *
2208  * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2209  *	than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2210  *
2211  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2212  *	within A-MPDU.
2213  *
2214  * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2215  *	for sent beacons.
2216  *
2217  * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2218  *	station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2219  *	by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2220  *	from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2221  *
2222  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2223  *	reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2224  *	order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2225  *	timeout.
2226  *
2227  * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2228  *	which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2229  *
2230  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2231  *	A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2232  *	When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2233  *	limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2234  *	max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2235  *
2236  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2237  *	skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2238  *
2239  * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2240  *	by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2241  *	drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2242  *	is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2243  *
2244  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2245  *	The stack will not do fragmentation.
2246  *	The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2247  *
2248  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2249  *	TDLS links.
2250  *
2251  * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2252  *	mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2253  *	deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2254  *	beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2255  *	virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2256  *	the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2257  *	deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2258  *
2259  * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2260  *	support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2261  *
2262  * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2263  *	course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2264  *
2265  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2266  *	extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2267  *	the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2268  *	but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2269  *	See also the documentation for that flag.
2270  *
2271  * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2272  *	MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2273  *	TXQs to start with.
2274  *
2275  * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2276  *	length in tx status information
2277  *
2278  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2279  *
2280  * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2281  *	only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2282  *
2283  * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2284  *	aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2285  *	A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2286  *
2287  * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2288  */
2289 enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2290 	IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2291 	IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2292 	IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2293 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2294 	IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2295 	IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2296 	IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2297 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2298 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2299 	IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2300 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2301 	IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2302 	IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2303 	IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2304 	IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2305 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2306 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2307 	IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2308 	IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2309 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2310 	IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2311 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2312 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2313 	IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2314 	IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2315 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2316 	IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2317 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2318 	IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2319 	IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2320 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2321 	IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2322 	IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2323 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2324 	IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2325 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2326 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2327 	IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2328 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2329 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2330 	IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2331 	IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2332 	IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2333 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2334 	IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2335 	IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2336 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2337 	IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2338 	IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2339 
2340 	/* keep last, obviously */
2341 	NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2342 };
2343 
2344 /**
2345  * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2346  *
2347  * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2348  * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2349  *
2350  * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2351  *	802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2352  *	members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2353  *	and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2354  *	bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2355  *
2356  * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2357  *
2358  * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2359  *	along with this structure.
2360  *
2361  * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2362  *
2363  * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2364  *	for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2365  *
2366  * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2367  *	Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2368  *
2369  * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2370  *	only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2371  *
2372  * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2373  *	that HW supports
2374  *
2375  * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2376  *	data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2377  *	queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2378  *
2379  * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2380  *	If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2381  *	set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2382  *
2383  * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2384  *	within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2385  * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2386  *	within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2387  * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2388  *	within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2389  * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2390  *	within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2391  *
2392  * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2393  *	can handle.
2394  * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2395  *	the hw can report back.
2396  * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2397  *
2398  * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2399  *	sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2400  *	aggregation.
2401  *	This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2402  *	number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2403  *	it shouldn't be set.
2404  *
2405  * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2406  *	aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2407  *	advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2408  *	the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2409  *	with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2410  *	For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2411  *
2412  * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2413  *	of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2414  *
2415  * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2416  *	(if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2417  *
2418  * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2419  *	reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2420  *	include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2421  *	adding _BW is supported today.
2422  *
2423  * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2424  *	the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2425  *	Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2426  *
2427  * @radiotap_he: HE radiotap validity flags
2428  *
2429  * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2430  *	@units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2431  *	field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2432  *	device_timestamp.
2433  * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2434  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2435  *	IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2436  * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2437  *	radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2438  *
2439  * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2440  *	from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2441  *	other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2442  *
2443  * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2444  *	for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2445  *	enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2446  *	Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2447  *	that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2448  *	neither enabled.
2449  *
2450  * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2451  *	deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2452  *	Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2453  *
2454  * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2455  * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2456  *	supported by HW.
2457  * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2458  *	device.
2459  *
2460  * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2461  *	them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2462  *	unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2463  *
2464  * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2465  *	refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2466  *
2467  * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2468  */
2469 struct ieee80211_hw {
2470 	struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2471 	struct wiphy *wiphy;
2472 	const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2473 	void *priv;
2474 	unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2475 	unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2476 	unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2477 	int vif_data_size;
2478 	int sta_data_size;
2479 	int chanctx_data_size;
2480 	int txq_data_size;
2481 	u16 queues;
2482 	u16 max_listen_interval;
2483 	s8 max_signal;
2484 	u8 max_rates;
2485 	u8 max_report_rates;
2486 	u8 max_rate_tries;
2487 	u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2488 	u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2489 	u8 max_tx_fragments;
2490 	u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2491 	u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2492 	u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2493 	struct {
2494 		int units_pos;
2495 		s16 accuracy;
2496 	} radiotap_timestamp;
2497 	netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2498 	u8 uapsd_queues;
2499 	u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2500 	u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2501 	const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2502 	u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2503 	u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
2504 	u8 weight_multiplier;
2505 	u32 max_mtu;
2506 };
2507 
_ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2508 static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2509 				       enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2510 {
2511 	return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2512 }
2513 #define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2514 
_ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)2515 static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2516 				     enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2517 {
2518 	return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2519 }
2520 #define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg)	_ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2521 
2522 /**
2523  * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2524  *
2525  * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2526  * @req: cfg80211 request.
2527  */
2528 struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2529 	struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2530 
2531 	/* Keep last */
2532 	struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2533 };
2534 
2535 /**
2536  * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2537  *
2538  * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2539  * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2540  * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2541  * @status: channel-switch response status
2542  * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2543  * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2544  * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2545  * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2546  * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2547  */
2548 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2549 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2550 	struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2551 	u8 action_code;
2552 	u32 status;
2553 	u32 timestamp;
2554 	u16 switch_time;
2555 	u16 switch_timeout;
2556 	struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2557 	u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2558 };
2559 
2560 /**
2561  * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2562  *
2563  * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2564  *
2565  * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2566  * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2567  * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2568  * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2569  * is already used internally by mac80211.
2570  *
2571  * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2572  */
2573 struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2574 
2575 /**
2576  * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2577  *
2578  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2579  * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2580  */
SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct device * dev)2581 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2582 {
2583 	set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2584 }
2585 
2586 /**
2587  * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2588  *
2589  * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2590  * @addr: the address to set
2591  */
SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const u8 * addr)2592 static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2593 {
2594 	memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2595 }
2596 
2597 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2598 ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2599 		      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2600 {
2601 	if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2602 		return NULL;
2603 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2604 }
2605 
2606 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c)2607 ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2608 			   const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2609 {
2610 	if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2611 		return NULL;
2612 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2613 }
2614 
2615 static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw * hw,const struct ieee80211_tx_info * c,int idx)2616 ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2617 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2618 {
2619 	if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2620 		return NULL;
2621 	return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2622 }
2623 
2624 /**
2625  * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2626  * @hw: the hardware
2627  * @skb: the skb
2628  *
2629  * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2630  * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2631  */
2632 void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2633 
2634 /**
2635  * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2636  *
2637  * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2638  * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2639  *
2640  * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2641  * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2642  * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2643  * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2644  * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2645  * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2646  * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2647  *
2648  * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2649  * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2650  * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2651  *
2652  * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2653  * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2654  * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2655  * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2656  *
2657  * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2658  * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2659  * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2660  * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2661  *
2662  * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2663  *
2664  * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2665  * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2666  * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2667  * based on the receive flags.
2668  *
2669  * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2670  * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2671  * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2672  * keys.
2673  *
2674  * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2675  * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2676  * handler.
2677  * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2678  * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2679  * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2680  * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2681  * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2682  * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2683  *
2684  * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2685  * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2686  * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2687  *
2688  * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
2689  * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to to following
2690  * requirements:
2691  * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to
2692       mac80211 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been
2693       completed when also setting @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV for any key,
2694    2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
2695       at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
2696    3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
2697       encrypted with the new key and
2698    4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
2699    Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
2700  */
2701 
2702 /**
2703  * DOC: Powersave support
2704  *
2705  * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2706  *
2707  * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2708  * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2709  * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2710  * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2711  * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2712  * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2713  * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2714  * it finds traffic directed to it.
2715  *
2716  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2717  * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2718  * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2719  * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2720  * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2721  *
2722  * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2723  * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2724  * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2725  *
2726  * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2727  * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2728  * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2729  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2730  * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2731  * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2732  * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2733  *
2734  * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2735  * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2736  * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2737  * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2738  * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2739  * periods.
2740  *
2741  * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2742  * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2743  * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2744  * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2745  * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2746  * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2747  * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2748  * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2749  * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2750  * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2751  *
2752  * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2753  * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2754  * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2755  * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2756  * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2757  * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2758  *
2759  * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2760  * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2761  */
2762 
2763 /**
2764  * DOC: Beacon filter support
2765  *
2766  * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2767  * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2768  * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2769  * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2770  * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2771  * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2772  * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2773  *
2774  * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2775  * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2776  * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2777  * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2778  * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2779  *
2780  * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2781  * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2782  * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2783  * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2784  *
2785  * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2786  * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2787  * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2788  * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2789  *
2790  *  - a list of information element IDs
2791  *  - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2792  *
2793  * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2794  * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2795  * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2796  * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2797  * vendor information elements.
2798  *
2799  * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2800  * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2801  *
2802  * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2803  * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2804  * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2805  * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2806  * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2807  * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2808  *
2809  *
2810  * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2811  * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2812  * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2813  * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2814  * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2815  * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2816  * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2817  * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2818  *
2819  * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2820  * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2821  * signal strength threshold checking.
2822  */
2823 
2824 /**
2825  * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2826  *
2827  * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2828  * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2829  * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2830  * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2831  *
2832  * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2833  * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2834  * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2835  * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2836  * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2837  * hardware flags.
2838  *
2839  * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2840  * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2841  * turned off otherwise.
2842  *
2843  * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2844  * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2845  * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2846  * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2847  */
2848 
2849 /**
2850  * DOC: Frame filtering
2851  *
2852  * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2853  * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2854  * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2855  * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2856  * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2857  *
2858  * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2859  * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2860  * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2861  *
2862  * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2863  * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2864  * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2865  * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2866  * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2867  * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2868  * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2869  *
2870  * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2871  * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2872  * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2873  * or dropped.
2874  *
2875  * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2876  * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2877  * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2878  * the flag, but not clear it.
2879  * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2880  * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2881  * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2882  * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2883  * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2884  * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2885  * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2886  * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2887  */
2888 
2889 /**
2890  * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2891  *
2892  * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2893  * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2894  * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2895  *
2896  * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2897  * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2898  * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2899  * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2900  * the driver code.
2901  *
2902  * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2903  * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2904  * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2905  * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2906  * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2907  * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2908  * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2909  *
2910  * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2911  * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2912  * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2913  * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2914  * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2915  * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2916  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2917  * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2918  * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2919  * @sta_notify callback.
2920  *
2921  * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2922  * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2923  * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2924  * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2925  * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2926  * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2927  * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
2928  * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
2929  * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2930  * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2931  * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2932  * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2933  * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2934  * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2935  *
2936  * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2937  * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2938  *
2939  * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2940  * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2941  * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2942  * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2943  * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2944  * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2945  * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2946  * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2947  * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2948  * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2949  * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2950  *
2951  * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2952  * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2953  * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2954  * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2955  * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2956  * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2957  * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2958  * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2959  * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2960  * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
2961  * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
2962  * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2963  * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2964  * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2965  *
2966  * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2967  * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2968  * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2969  * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2970  * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
2971  * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
2972  * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2973  *
2974  * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2975  * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2976  * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2977  * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
2978  * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
2979  *
2980  * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2981  * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2982  * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2983  * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
2984  */
2985 
2986 /**
2987  * DOC: HW queue control
2988  *
2989  * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2990  * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2991  * was problematic for a few reasons:
2992  * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2993  * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2994  * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2995  *
2996  * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2997  * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2998  * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2999  *
3000  * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3001  * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3002  * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3003  * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3004  * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3005  * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3006  * the hardware queue.
3007  * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3008  * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3009  *
3010  * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
3011  * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3012  * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3013  * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3014  * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3015  *
3016  * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3017  * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3018  * after-DTIM queue for AP:   8
3019  * off-channel queue:         9
3020  *
3021  * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3022  *   hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3023  *
3024  * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3025  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3026  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3027  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3028  *   vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3029  *   vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3030  * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3031  *
3032  * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3033  * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3034  *
3035  * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3036  * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3037  * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3038  * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3039  */
3040 
3041 /**
3042  * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3043  *
3044  * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3045  * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3046  * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3047  * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3048  *
3049  * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3050  *	by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3051  *	multicast address.
3052  *
3053  * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3054  *	%RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3055  *
3056  * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3057  *	the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3058  *
3059  * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3060  *	to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3061  *	by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3062  *	mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3063  *	honour this flag if possible.
3064  *
3065  * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3066  *	station
3067  *
3068  * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3069  *
3070  * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3071  *
3072  * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3073  */
3074 enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3075 	FIF_ALLMULTI		= 1<<1,
3076 	FIF_FCSFAIL		= 1<<2,
3077 	FIF_PLCPFAIL		= 1<<3,
3078 	FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC	= 1<<4,
3079 	FIF_CONTROL		= 1<<5,
3080 	FIF_OTHER_BSS		= 1<<6,
3081 	FIF_PSPOLL		= 1<<7,
3082 	FIF_PROBE_REQ		= 1<<8,
3083 };
3084 
3085 /**
3086  * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3087  *
3088  * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3089  * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3090  *
3091  * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3092  * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3093  * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3094  * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3095  *
3096  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3097  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3098  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
3099  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3100  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3101  *	queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3102  *	driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3103  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3104  *	called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3105  *	ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3106  *	session is gone and removes the station.
3107  * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3108  *	but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3109  *	now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3110  *	should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3111  */
3112 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3113 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3114 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3115 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3116 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3117 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3118 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3119 	IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3120 };
3121 
3122 /**
3123  * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3124  *
3125  * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3126  * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3127  * @tid: tid of the BA session
3128  * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3129  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3130  *	actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3131  * @buf_size: reorder buffer size  (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3132  *	action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3133  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3134  * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3135  *	valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3136  * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3137  *	%IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3138  */
3139 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3140 	enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3141 	struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3142 	u16 tid;
3143 	u16 ssn;
3144 	u16 buf_size;
3145 	bool amsdu;
3146 	u16 timeout;
3147 };
3148 
3149 /**
3150  * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3151  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3152  * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3153  *	frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3154  */
3155 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3156 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3157 	IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3158 };
3159 
3160 /**
3161  * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3162  *
3163  * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3164  *	to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3165  *	information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3166  *	flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3167  * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3168  * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3169  *	changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3170  *	the peer.
3171  * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3172  *	by the peer
3173  */
3174 enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3175 	IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED		= BIT(0),
3176 	IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED	= BIT(1),
3177 	IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED	= BIT(2),
3178 	IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED	= BIT(3),
3179 };
3180 
3181 /**
3182  * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3183  *
3184  * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3185  * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3186  * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
3187  * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3188  * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3189  *
3190  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3191  * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3192  *	for sending managment frames offchannel.
3193  */
3194 enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3195 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3196 	IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3197 };
3198 
3199 /**
3200  * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
3201  *
3202  * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3203  * reconfiguration type was completed.
3204  *
3205  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3206  *	(also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3207  * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3208  *	of wowlan configuration)
3209  */
3210 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3211 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3212 	IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3213 };
3214 
3215 /**
3216  * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3217  *
3218  * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3219  * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3220  * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3221  *
3222  * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3223  *	skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3224  *	The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3225  *	configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3226  *	preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3227  *	Must be atomic.
3228  *
3229  * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3230  *	is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3231  *	frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3232  *	Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3233  *	or zero.
3234  *	When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3235  *	to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3236  *	is added.
3237  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3238  *
3239  * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3240  *	is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3241  *	it must turn off frame reception.)
3242  *	May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3243  *	an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3244  *	you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3245  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3246  *
3247  * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3248  *	stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3249  *	ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3250  *	configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3251  *	reconfigured at resume time.
3252  *	The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3253  *	wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3254  *	supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3255  *	must return 1 from this function.
3256  *
3257  * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3258  *	now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3259  *	functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3260  *	to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3261  *	will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3262  *
3263  * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3264  *	modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3265  *	supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3266  *	in suspend().
3267  *
3268  * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3269  *	enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3270  *	and @stop must be implemented.
3271  *	The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3272  *	the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3273  *	interface is given in the conf parameter.
3274  *	The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3275  *	negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3276  *	Must be implemented and can sleep.
3277  *
3278  * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3279  *	is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3280  *	switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3281  *	Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3282  *	found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3283  *
3284  * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3285  *	The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3286  *	and no monitor interfaces are present.
3287  *	When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3288  *	must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3289  *	the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3290  *	MAC address of the device going away.
3291  *	Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3292  *
3293  * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3294  *	function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3295  *	This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3296  *	if it does. The callback can sleep.
3297  *
3298  * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3299  *	parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3300  *	level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3301  *	This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3302  *	for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3303  *	of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3304  *	can sleep.
3305  *
3306  * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3307  *	This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3308  *	to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3309  *
3310  * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3311  *	See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3312  *	This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3313  *
3314  * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3315  *	This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3316  *	should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3317  *	of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3318  *	which flags are changed.
3319  *	This callback can sleep.
3320  *
3321  * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3322  * 	must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3323  *
3324  * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3325  *	This callback is only called between add_interface and
3326  *	remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3327  *	is enabled.
3328  *	Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3329  *	The callback can sleep.
3330  *
3331  * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3332  * 	This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3333  * 	which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3334  *	The callback must be atomic.
3335  *
3336  * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3337  *	host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3338  *	necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3339  *	After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3340  *	userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3341  *
3342  * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3343  *	WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3344  *	offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3345  *
3346  * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3347  *	the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3348  *	configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3349  *	registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3350  *	that power save is disabled.
3351  *	The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3352  *	entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3353  *	at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3354  *	(extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3355  *	When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3356  *	note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3357  *	any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3358  *	This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3359  *	this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3360  *	software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3361  *	capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3362  *	advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3363  *	The callback can sleep.
3364  *
3365  * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3366  *	The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3367  *	but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3368  *	ieee80211_scan_completed().
3369  *	This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3370  *	scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3371  *	The callback can sleep.
3372  *
3373  * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3374  *	specific intervals.  The driver must call the
3375  *	ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3376  *	This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3377  *
3378  * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3379  *	In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3380  *
3381  * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3382  *	is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3383  *	The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3384  *	the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3385  *	can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3386  *
3387  * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3388  *	software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3389  *	this notification.
3390  *	The callback can sleep.
3391  *
3392  * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3393  * 	Returns zero if statistics are available.
3394  *	The callback can sleep.
3395  *
3396  * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3397  *	IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3398  *	IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3399  *	The callback must be atomic.
3400  *
3401  * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3402  *	if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3403  *	stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3404  *	should be set as well.
3405  *	The callback can sleep.
3406  *
3407  * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3408  *	The callback can sleep.
3409  *
3410  * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3411  *	AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3412  *
3413  * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3414  *	station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3415  *	returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3416  *	no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3417  *	the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3418  *	This callback can sleep.
3419  *
3420  * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3421  *	when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3422  *	should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3423  *	callback can sleep.
3424  *
3425  * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3426  *	associated station, AP,  IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3427  *	in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3428  *	%IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3429  *
3430  * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3431  *	station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3432  *	This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3433  *	It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3434  *	up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3435  *	isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3436  *	period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3437  *	See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3438  *	The callback can sleep.
3439  *
3440  * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3441  *	synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3442  *	pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3443  *	the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3444  *	in @sta_state.
3445  *	The callback can sleep.
3446  *
3447  * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3448  *	used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3449  *	from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3450  *	in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3451  *	uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3452  *	otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3453  *	Must be atomic.
3454  * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3455  *	is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3456  *	the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3457  *
3458  * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3459  *	filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3460  *	let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3461  *	the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3462  *	all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3463  *	Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3464  *	The callback can sleep.
3465  *
3466  * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3467  *	bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3468  *	Returns a negative error code on failure.
3469  *	The callback can sleep.
3470  *
3471  * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3472  *	this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3473  *	required function.
3474  *	The callback can sleep.
3475  *
3476  * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3477  *	Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3478  *	required function.
3479  *	The callback can sleep.
3480  *
3481  * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3482  *	firmware/hardware.  Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3483  *	calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3484  *	as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3485  *	The callback can sleep.
3486  *
3487  * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3488  *	with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3489  *	function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3490  *	TSF synchronization.
3491  *	The callback can sleep.
3492  *
3493  * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3494  *	This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3495  *	used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3496  *	Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3497  *	The callback can sleep.
3498  *
3499  * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3500  *
3501  * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3502  *	need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3503  *	and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3504  *	The callback can sleep.
3505  *
3506  * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3507  *	in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3508  *	accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3509  *	estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3510  *	coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3511  *
3512  * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3513  *	be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3514  * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3515  *
3516  * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3517  *	that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3518  *	of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3519  *	use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3520  *	If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3521  *	Note that vif can be NULL.
3522  *	The callback can sleep.
3523  *
3524  * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3525  *	switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3526  *	callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3527  *	completion of the channel switch.
3528  *
3529  * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3530  *	Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3531  *	reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3532  *	(also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3533  *
3534  * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3535  *
3536  * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3537  *	call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3538  *	that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3539  *	offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3540  *	normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3541  *	duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3542  *	ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3543  *	Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3544  *	must be accepted in this case.
3545  *	This callback may sleep.
3546  * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3547  *	aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3548  *
3549  * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3550  *
3551  * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3552  *
3553  * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3554  *	queues before entering power save.
3555  *
3556  * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3557  *	when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3558  *	The callback can sleep.
3559  * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3560  *	&enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3561  *	The callback must be atomic.
3562  *
3563  * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3564  *	parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3565  *	sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3566  *	to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3567  *	Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3568  *	if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3569  *	the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3570  *	the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3571  *	more-data bit must always be set.
3572  *	The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3573  *	from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3574  *	In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3575  *	@num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3576  *	this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3577  *	on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3578  *	period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3579  *	responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3580  *	In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3581  *	bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3582  *	at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3583  *	setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3584  *	service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3585  *	on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3586  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3587  *	This callback must be atomic.
3588  * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3589  *	to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3590  *	via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3591  *	released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3592  *	and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3593  *	frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3594  *	them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3595  *	on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3596  *	bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3597  *	ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3598  *	The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3599  *	frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3600  *	This callback must be atomic.
3601  *
3602  * @get_et_sset_count:  Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3603  *
3604  * @get_et_stats:  Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3605  *
3606  * @get_et_strings:  Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3607  *	and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3608  *
3609  * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3610  *	before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3611  *	bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3612  *	yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3613  *	transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3614  *	powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3615  *	management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3616  *	driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3617  *	and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3618  *	For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3619  *	would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3620  *	frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3621  *	The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3622  *	mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3623  *      If duration is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the driver the
3624  *      duration for which the operation is requested.
3625  *	The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3626  *
3627  * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3628  *	a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3629  *	channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3630  *	setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3631  *	mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3632  *	discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3633  *	2 * (DTIM period).
3634  *	The callback is optional and can sleep.
3635  *
3636  * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3637  *	This callback may sleep.
3638  * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3639  *	This callback may sleep.
3640  * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3641  *	may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3642  *	channel context with different settings
3643  *	This callback may sleep.
3644  * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3645  *	to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3646  *	This callback may sleep.
3647  * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3648  *	unbound from vif.
3649  *	This callback may sleep.
3650  * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3651  *	another, as specified in the list of
3652  *	@ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3653  *	to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3654  *	This callback may sleep.
3655  *
3656  * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3657  *	information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3658  *	context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3659  *	software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3660  *	just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3661  *	disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3662  * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3663  *
3664  * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3665  *	during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3666  *	This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3667  *	indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3668  *	This callback may sleep.
3669  *
3670  * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3671  *	Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3672  *	This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3673  *
3674  * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3675  *	Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3676  *	function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3677  *	decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3678  *	ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3679  *	get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3680  *	1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3681  *	transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3682  *	If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3683  *	since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3684  * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3685  *	before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3686  *	gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3687  *	the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3688  * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3689  *	after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3690  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3691  * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3692  *	when channel switch procedure was completed, allowing the
3693  *	driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3694  * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
3695  *	when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
3696  *	CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
3697  * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3698  *	information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3699  *	channel context is bound before this is called.
3700  * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3701  *
3702  * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3703  *	specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3704  *	if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3705  *
3706  * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3707  *	and hardware limits.
3708  *
3709  * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3710  *	is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3711  *	and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3712  *	driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3713  *	the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3714  *	The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3715  *	optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3716  * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3717  *	peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3718  * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3719  *	response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3720  *	parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3721  *	an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3722  *	response template is provided, together with the location of the
3723  *	switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3724  *	the function call.
3725  *
3726  * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3727  * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3728  *	synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3729  *	pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3730  *	currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3731  *
3732  * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3733  * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3734  * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3735  *	contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3736  *	are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3737  *	The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3738  *	some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3739  *	changed parameters.
3740  * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3741  *	cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3742  *	this call.
3743  * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3744  *	ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3745  *	NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3746  * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
3747  *	aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
3748  *	between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
3749  *	skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
3750  * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
3751  *	Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
3752  *
3753  * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
3754  * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
3755  */
3756 struct ieee80211_ops {
3757 	void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3758 		   struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3759 		   struct sk_buff *skb);
3760 	int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3761 	void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3762 #ifdef CONFIG_PM
3763 	int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3764 	int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3765 	void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3766 #endif
3767 	int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3768 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3769 	int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3770 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3771 				enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3772 	void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3773 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3774 	int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3775 	void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3776 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3777 				 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3778 				 u32 changed);
3779 
3780 	int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3781 	void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3782 
3783 	u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3784 				 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3785 	void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3786 				 unsigned int changed_flags,
3787 				 unsigned int *total_flags,
3788 				 u64 multicast);
3789 	void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3790 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3791 				    unsigned int filter_flags,
3792 				    unsigned int changed_flags);
3793 	int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3794 		       bool set);
3795 	int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3796 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3797 		       struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3798 	void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3799 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3800 				struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3801 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3802 				u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3803 	void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3804 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3805 			       struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3806 	void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3807 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3808 	int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3809 		       struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3810 	void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3811 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3812 	int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3813 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3814 				struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3815 				struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3816 	int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3817 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3818 	void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3819 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3820 			      const u8 *mac_addr);
3821 	void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3822 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3823 	int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3824 			 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3825 	void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3826 			    struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3827 			    struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3828 	int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3829 	int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3830 	int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3831 		       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3832 	int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3833 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3834 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3835 	void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3836 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3837 				struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3838 				struct dentry *dir);
3839 #endif
3840 	void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3841 			enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3842 	int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3843 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3844 			     struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3845 	int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3846 			 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3847 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3848 			 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3849 	void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3850 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3851 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3852 	void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3853 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3854 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3855 			      u32 changed);
3856 	void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3857 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3858 				    struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3859 	void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3860 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3861 			       struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3862 			       struct station_info *sinfo);
3863 	int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3864 		       struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
3865 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
3866 	u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3867 	void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3868 			u64 tsf);
3869 	void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3870 			   s64 offset);
3871 	void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3872 	int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3873 
3874 	/**
3875 	 * @ampdu_action:
3876 	 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3877 	 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3878 	 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3879 	 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3880 	 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3881 	 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3882 	 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3883 	 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3884 	 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3885 	 *
3886 	 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3887 	 * - ``RX:  2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3888 	 * - ``TX:        8..1...``
3889 	 *
3890 	 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3891 	 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3892 	 *
3893 	 * - ``TX:        1   or``
3894 	 * - ``TX:        18  or``
3895 	 * - ``TX:        81``
3896 	 *
3897 	 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3898 	 *
3899 	 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3900 	 * The callback can sleep.
3901 	 */
3902 	int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3903 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3904 			    struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
3905 	int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3906 		struct survey_info *survey);
3907 	void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3908 	void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
3909 #ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
3910 	int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3911 			    void *data, int len);
3912 	int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3913 			     struct netlink_callback *cb,
3914 			     void *data, int len);
3915 #endif
3916 	void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3917 		      u32 queues, bool drop);
3918 	void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3919 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3920 			       struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3921 	int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3922 	int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
3923 
3924 	int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3925 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3926 				 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
3927 				 int duration,
3928 				 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
3929 	int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3930 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3931 	int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3932 	void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3933 			      u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
3934 	bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3935 	int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3936 				const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
3937 	void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3938 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3939 			       const struct ieee80211_event *event);
3940 
3941 	void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3942 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3943 				      u16 tids, int num_frames,
3944 				      enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3945 				      bool more_data);
3946 	void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3947 					struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3948 					u16 tids, int num_frames,
3949 					enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3950 					bool more_data);
3951 
3952 	int	(*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3953 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3954 	void	(*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3955 				struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3956 				struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3957 	void	(*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3958 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3959 				  u32 sset, u8 *data);
3960 
3961 	void	(*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3962 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3963 				  u16 duration);
3964 
3965 	void	(*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3966 					     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3967 
3968 	int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3969 			   struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3970 	void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3971 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3972 	void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3973 			       struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3974 			       u32 changed);
3975 	int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3976 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3977 				  struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3978 	void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3979 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3980 				     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3981 	int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3982 				  struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3983 				  int n_vifs,
3984 				  enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
3985 
3986 	void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3987 				  enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
3988 
3989 #if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3990 	void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3991 				 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3992 				 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3993 #endif
3994 	void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3995 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3996 				      struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
3997 	int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3998 				  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3999 				  struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4000 
4001 	int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4002 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4003 	void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4004 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4005 	void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4006 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4007 					 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4008 
4009 	int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4010 	void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4011 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4012 				       struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4013 	int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4014 			   int *dbm);
4015 
4016 	int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4017 				   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4018 				   struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4019 				   struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4020 				   struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4021 	void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4022 					   struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4023 					   struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4024 	void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4025 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4026 					 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4027 
4028 	void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4029 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4030 	void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4031 
4032 	int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4033 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4034 			 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4035 	int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4036 			struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4037 	int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4038 			       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4039 			       struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4040 	int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4041 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4042 			    const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4043 	void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4044 			    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4045 			    u8 instance_id);
4046 	bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4047 				       struct sk_buff *head,
4048 				       struct sk_buff *skb);
4049 	int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4050 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4051 				       struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4052 	int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4053 			  struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4054 	void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4055 			   struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4056 };
4057 
4058 /**
4059  * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4060  *
4061  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4062  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4063  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4064  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4065  * @priv_data_len.
4066  *
4067  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4068  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4069  * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4070  *	NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4071  *
4072  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4073  */
4074 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4075 					   const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4076 					   const char *requested_name);
4077 
4078 /**
4079  * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4080  *
4081  * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4082  * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4083  * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4084  * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4085  * @priv_data_len.
4086  *
4087  * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4088  * @ops: callbacks for this device
4089  *
4090  * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4091  */
4092 static inline
ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,const struct ieee80211_ops * ops)4093 struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4094 					const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4095 {
4096 	return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4097 }
4098 
4099 /**
4100  * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4101  *
4102  * You must call this function before any other functions in
4103  * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4104  * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4105  *
4106  * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4107  *
4108  * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4109  */
4110 int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4111 
4112 /**
4113  * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4114  * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4115  * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4116  *	(full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4117  */
4118 struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4119 	int throughput;
4120 	int blink_time;
4121 };
4122 
4123 /**
4124  * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4125  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4126  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4127  * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4128  *	interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4129  */
4130 enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4131 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO		= BIT(0),
4132 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK		= BIT(1),
4133 	IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED	= BIT(2),
4134 };
4135 
4136 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4137 const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4138 const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4139 const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4140 const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4141 const char *
4142 __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4143 				   unsigned int flags,
4144 				   const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4145 				   unsigned int blink_table_len);
4146 #endif
4147 /**
4148  * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4149  *
4150  * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4151  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4152  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4153  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4154  *
4155  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4156  *
4157  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4158  */
ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4159 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4160 {
4161 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4162 	return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4163 #else
4164 	return NULL;
4165 #endif
4166 }
4167 
4168 /**
4169  * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4170  *
4171  * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4172  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4173  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4174  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4175  *
4176  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4177  *
4178  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4179  */
ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4180 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4181 {
4182 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4183 	return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4184 #else
4185 	return NULL;
4186 #endif
4187 }
4188 
4189 /**
4190  * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4191  *
4192  * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4193  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4194  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4195  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4196  *
4197  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4198  *
4199  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4200  */
ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4201 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4202 {
4203 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4204 	return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4205 #else
4206 	return NULL;
4207 #endif
4208 }
4209 
4210 /**
4211  * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4212  *
4213  * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4214  * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4215  * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4216  * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4217  *
4218  * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4219  *
4220  * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4221  */
ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw * hw)4222 static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4223 {
4224 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4225 	return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4226 #else
4227 	return NULL;
4228 #endif
4229 }
4230 
4231 /**
4232  * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4233  * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4234  * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4235  * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4236  * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4237  *
4238  * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4239  * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4240  *
4241  * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4242  */
4243 static inline const char *
ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,unsigned int flags,const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink * blink_table,unsigned int blink_table_len)4244 ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4245 				 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4246 				 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4247 {
4248 #ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4249 	return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4250 						  blink_table_len);
4251 #else
4252 	return NULL;
4253 #endif
4254 }
4255 
4256 /**
4257  * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4258  *
4259  * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4260  * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4261  *
4262  * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4263  */
4264 void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4265 
4266 /**
4267  * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4268  *
4269  * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4270  * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4271  * before calling this function.
4272  *
4273  * @hw: the hardware to free
4274  */
4275 void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4276 
4277 /**
4278  * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4279  *
4280  * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4281  * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4282  * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4283  * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4284  * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4285  * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4286  *
4287  * @hw: the hardware to restart
4288  */
4289 void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4290 
4291 /**
4292  * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4293  *
4294  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4295  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4296  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4297  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4298  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4299  *
4300  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4301  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4302  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4303  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4304  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4305  *
4306  * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4307  *
4308  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4309  * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4310  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4311  * @napi: the NAPI context
4312  */
4313 void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4314 		       struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4315 
4316 /**
4317  * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4318  *
4319  * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4320  * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4321  * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4322  * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4323  * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4324  *
4325  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4326  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4327  * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4328  * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4329  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4330  *
4331  * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4332  *
4333  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4334  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4335  */
ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4336 static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4337 {
4338 	ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4339 }
4340 
4341 /**
4342  * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4343  *
4344  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4345  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4346  *
4347  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4348  * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4349  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4350  *
4351  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4352  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4353  */
4354 void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4355 
4356 /**
4357  * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4358  *
4359  * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4360  * (internally disables bottom halves).
4361  *
4362  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4363  * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4364  * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4365  *
4366  * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4367  * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4368  */
ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4369 static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4370 				   struct sk_buff *skb)
4371 {
4372 	local_bh_disable();
4373 	ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4374 	local_bh_enable();
4375 }
4376 
4377 /**
4378  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4379  *
4380  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4381  * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4382  * entering/leaving PS mode.
4383  *
4384  * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4385  *
4386  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4387  * each other.
4388  *
4389  * @sta: currently connected sta
4390  * @start: start or stop PS
4391  *
4392  * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4393  */
4394 int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4395 
4396 /**
4397  * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4398  *                                  (in process context)
4399  *
4400  * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4401  * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4402  * applies.
4403  *
4404  * @sta: currently connected sta
4405  * @start: start or stop PS
4406  *
4407  * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4408  */
ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,bool start)4409 static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4410 						  bool start)
4411 {
4412 	int ret;
4413 
4414 	local_bh_disable();
4415 	ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4416 	local_bh_enable();
4417 
4418 	return ret;
4419 }
4420 
4421 /**
4422  * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4423  * @sta: currently connected station
4424  *
4425  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4426  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4427  * connected station was received.
4428  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4429  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4430  * be serialized.
4431  */
4432 void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4433 
4434 /**
4435  * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4436  * @sta: currently connected station
4437  * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4438  *
4439  * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4440  * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4441  * from a connected station was received.
4442  * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4443  * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4444  * serialized.
4445  * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4446  * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4447  * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4448  * checks.
4449  */
4450 void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4451 
4452 /*
4453  * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4454  * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4455  */
4456 #define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM	ALIGN(14, 4)
4457 
4458 /**
4459  * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4460  * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4461  * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4462  * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4463  *
4464  * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4465  * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4466  * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4467  *
4468  * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4469  * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4470  * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4471  * call! Beware of the locking!)
4472  *
4473  * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4474  * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4475  * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4476  * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4477  * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4478  * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4479  *
4480  * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4481  * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4482  * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4483  * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4484  * use this API.
4485  */
4486 void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4487 				u8 tid, bool buffered);
4488 
4489 /**
4490  * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4491  *
4492  * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4493  * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4494  * rate selection table for the station entry.
4495  *
4496  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4497  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4498  * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4499  * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4500  * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4501  */
4502 void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4503 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4504 			    struct sk_buff *skb,
4505 			    struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4506 			    int max_rates);
4507 
4508 /**
4509  * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4510  *
4511  * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4512  * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4513  * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4514  * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4515  * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4516  * slow stations to starve).
4517  *
4518  * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4519  * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4520  */
4521 void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4522 					   u32 thr);
4523 
4524 /**
4525  * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
4526  *
4527  * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
4528  * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
4529  * in updating the tx rate in data path.
4530  *
4531  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4532  * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
4533  * @info: tx status information
4534  */
4535 void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4536 			      struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4537 			      struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
4538 
4539 /**
4540  * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4541  *
4542  * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4543  * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4544  * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4545  *
4546  * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4547  * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4548  * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4549  * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4550  * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4551  *
4552  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4553  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4554  */
4555 void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4556 			 struct sk_buff *skb);
4557 
4558 /**
4559  * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4560  *
4561  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4562  * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4563  * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4564  *
4565  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4566  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4567  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4568  *
4569  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4570  * @status: tx status information
4571  */
4572 void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4573 			     struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4574 
4575 /**
4576  * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4577  *
4578  * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4579  * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4580  * specific skbs.
4581  *
4582  * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4583  * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4584  * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4585  *
4586  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4587  * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4588  *	(NULL for multicast packets)
4589  * @info: tx status information
4590  */
ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_sta * sta,struct ieee80211_tx_info * info)4591 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4592 					     struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4593 					     struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4594 {
4595 	struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4596 		.sta = sta,
4597 		.info = info,
4598 	};
4599 
4600 	ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4601 }
4602 
4603 /**
4604  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4605  *
4606  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4607  *
4608  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4609  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4610  * for a single hardware.
4611  *
4612  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4613  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4614  */
ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct sk_buff * skb)4615 static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4616 					  struct sk_buff *skb)
4617 {
4618 	local_bh_disable();
4619 	ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4620 	local_bh_enable();
4621 }
4622 
4623 /**
4624  * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4625  *
4626  * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4627  * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4628  *
4629  * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4630  * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4631  *
4632  * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4633  * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4634  */
4635 void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4636 				 struct sk_buff *skb);
4637 
4638 /**
4639  * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4640  *
4641  * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4642  * connected STA.
4643  *
4644  * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4645  * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4646  */
4647 void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4648 
4649 #define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4650 
4651 /**
4652  * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4653  * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4654  * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4655  * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4656  *	to CSA counters.  This array can contain zero values which
4657  *	should be ignored.
4658  */
4659 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4660 	u16 tim_offset;
4661 	u16 tim_length;
4662 
4663 	u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
4664 };
4665 
4666 /**
4667  * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4668  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4669  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4670  * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4671  *	receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4672  *
4673  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4674  * obtain the beacon template.
4675  *
4676  * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4677  * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4678  * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4679  * applicable, the CSA count.
4680  *
4681  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4682  *
4683  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4684  */
4685 struct sk_buff *
4686 ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4687 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4688 			      struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4689 
4690 /**
4691  * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4692  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4693  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4694  * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4695  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4696  * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4697  *	(including the ID and length bytes!).
4698  *	Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4699  *
4700  * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4701  * obtain the beacon frame.
4702  *
4703  * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4704  * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4705  * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4706  * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4707  *
4708  * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4709  *
4710  * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4711  */
4712 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4713 					 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4714 					 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4715 
4716 /**
4717  * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4718  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4719  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4720  *
4721  * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4722  *
4723  * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4724  */
ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_vif * vif)4725 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4726 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4727 {
4728 	return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4729 }
4730 
4731 /**
4732  * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4733  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4734  *
4735  * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4736  * This function is called implicitly when
4737  * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4738  * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4739  * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4740  *
4741  * Return: new csa counter value
4742  */
4743 u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4744 
4745 /**
4746  * ieee80211_csa_set_counter - request mac80211 to set csa counter
4747  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4748  * @counter: the new value for the counter
4749  *
4750  * The csa counter can be changed by the device, this API should be
4751  * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
4752  *
4753  * It should never be used together with ieee80211_csa_update_counter(),
4754  * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
4755  */
4756 void ieee80211_csa_set_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
4757 
4758 /**
4759  * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4760  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4761  *
4762  * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4763  * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4764  * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4765  */
4766 void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4767 
4768 /**
4769  * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
4770  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4771  *
4772  * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4773  */
4774 bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4775 
4776 
4777 /**
4778  * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4779  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4780  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4781  *
4782  * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4783  * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4784  *
4785  * Can only be called in AP mode.
4786  *
4787  * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4788  */
4789 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4790 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4791 
4792 /**
4793  * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4794  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4795  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4796  *
4797  * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4798  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4799  * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4800  *
4801  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4802  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
4803  *
4804  * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
4805  */
4806 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4807 				     struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4808 
4809 /**
4810  * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4811  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4812  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4813  * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4814  *	if at all possible
4815  *
4816  * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4817  * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4818  * BSSID and address is used.
4819  *
4820  * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4821  * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4822  *
4823  * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4824  * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
4825  *
4826  * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
4827  */
4828 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4829 				       struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4830 				       bool qos_ok);
4831 
4832 /**
4833  * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4834  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4835  * @src_addr: source MAC address
4836  * @ssid: SSID buffer
4837  * @ssid_len: length of SSID
4838  * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
4839  *
4840  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4841  * hardware.
4842  *
4843  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
4844  */
4845 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4846 				       const u8 *src_addr,
4847 				       const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
4848 				       size_t tailroom);
4849 
4850 /**
4851  * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4852  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4853  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4854  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4855  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4856  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4857  * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4858  *
4859  * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4860  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4861  * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4862  * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4863  */
4864 void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4865 		       const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4866 		       const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4867 		       struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4868 
4869 /**
4870  * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4871  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4872  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4873  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4874  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4875  *
4876  * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4877  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4878  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4879  *
4880  * Return: The duration.
4881  */
4882 __le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4883 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
4884 			      const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4885 
4886 /**
4887  * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4888  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4889  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4890  * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4891  * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4892  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4893  * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4894  *
4895  * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4896  * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4897  * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4898  * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4899  */
4900 void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4901 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4902 			     const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4903 			     const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4904 			     struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4905 
4906 /**
4907  * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4908  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4909  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4910  * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4911  * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4912  *
4913  * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4914  * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4915  * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4916  *
4917  * Return: The duration.
4918  */
4919 __le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4920 				    struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4921 				    size_t frame_len,
4922 				    const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4923 
4924 /**
4925  * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4926  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4927  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4928  * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
4929  * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
4930  * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
4931  *
4932  * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4933  * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
4934  *
4935  * Return: The duration.
4936  */
4937 __le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4938 					struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4939 					enum nl80211_band band,
4940 					size_t frame_len,
4941 					struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
4942 
4943 /**
4944  * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4945  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4946  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4947  *
4948  * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4949  * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4950  * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4951  * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
4952  * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4953  *
4954  * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4955  * frames are available.
4956  *
4957  * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4958  * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4959  * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4960  * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4961  * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4962  * use common code for all beacons.
4963  */
4964 struct sk_buff *
4965 ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4966 
4967 /**
4968  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4969  *
4970  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4971  *
4972  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4973  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4974  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4975  */
4976 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4977 			       u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4978 
4979 /**
4980  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
4981  *
4982  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4983  * from the given packet.
4984  *
4985  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4986  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4987  *	with this P1K
4988  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4989  */
ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf * keyconf,struct sk_buff * skb,u16 * p1k)4990 static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4991 					  struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4992 {
4993 	struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4994 	const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4995 	u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4996 
4997 	ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4998 }
4999 
5000 /**
5001  * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5002  *
5003  * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5004  * and transmitter address.
5005  *
5006  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5007  * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5008  * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5009  * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5010  */
5011 void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5012 			       const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5013 
5014 /**
5015  * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5016  *
5017  * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5018  * in the packet.
5019  *
5020  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5021  * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5022  *	encrypted with this key
5023  * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5024  */
5025 void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5026 			    struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5027 
5028 /**
5029  * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5030  *
5031  * @pos: start of crypto header
5032  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5033  * @pn: PN to add
5034  *
5035  * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5036  * the packet payload)
5037  *
5038  * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5039  * point to the crypto header)
5040  */
5041 u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5042 
5043 /**
5044  * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5045  *
5046  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5047  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5048  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5049  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5050  * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5051  *
5052  * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5053  * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5054  * by the device and not by mac80211.
5055  *
5056  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5057  * can be done concurrently.
5058  */
5059 void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5060 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5061 
5062 /**
5063  * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5064  *
5065  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5066  * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5067  *	the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5068  *	CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5069  * @seq: new sequence data
5070  *
5071  * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5072  * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5073  * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5074  * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5075  *
5076  * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5077  * can be done concurrently.
5078  */
5079 void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5080 			      int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5081 
5082 /**
5083  * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5084  * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5085  *
5086  * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5087  * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5088  * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5089  *
5090  * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
5091  * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
5092  */
5093 void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5094 
5095 /**
5096  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5097  * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5098  * @keyconf: new key data
5099  *
5100  * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5101  * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5102  * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5103  *
5104  * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5105  * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5106  * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5107  * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5108  *
5109  * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5110  * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5111  * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5112  * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5113  * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5114  * of the reconfiguration.
5115  *
5116  * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5117  * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5118  *
5119  * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5120  * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5121  * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5122  * the key that's being replaced.
5123  */
5124 struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5125 ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5126 			struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5127 
5128 /**
5129  * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5130  * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5131  * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5132  * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5133  * @gfp: allocation flags
5134  */
5135 void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5136 				const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5137 
5138 /**
5139  * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
5140  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5141  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5142  *
5143  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5144  */
5145 void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5146 
5147 /**
5148  * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
5149  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5150  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5151  *
5152  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5153  */
5154 void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5155 
5156 /**
5157  * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
5158  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5159  * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
5160  *
5161  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5162  *
5163  * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
5164  */
5165 
5166 int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
5167 
5168 /**
5169  * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
5170  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5171  *
5172  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
5173  */
5174 void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5175 
5176 /**
5177  * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
5178  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5179  *
5180  * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
5181  */
5182 void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5183 
5184 /**
5185  * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
5186  *
5187  * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
5188  * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
5189  * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
5190  * any context, including hardirq context.
5191  *
5192  * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
5193  * @info: information about the completed scan
5194  */
5195 void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5196 			      struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
5197 
5198 /**
5199  * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
5200  *
5201  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
5202  * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
5203  *
5204  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5205  */
5206 void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5207 
5208 /**
5209  * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
5210  *
5211  * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
5212  * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
5213  * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
5214  * while associating, for instance.
5215  *
5216  * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
5217  */
5218 void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5219 
5220 /**
5221  * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
5222  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
5223  *	been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
5224  *	reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
5225  *	interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
5226  *	haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5227  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
5228  *	interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
5229  * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
5230  */
5231 enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
5232 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL	= 0,
5233 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL	= BIT(0),
5234 	IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE	= BIT(1),
5235 };
5236 
5237 /**
5238  * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
5239  *
5240  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5241  * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
5242  * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
5243  * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5244  *
5245  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5246  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5247  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5248  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5249  */
5250 void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5251 				  void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5252 						   struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5253 				  void *data);
5254 
5255 /**
5256  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
5257  *
5258  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5259  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5260  * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
5261  * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
5262  * be used.
5263  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5264  *
5265  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5266  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5267  * @iterator: the iterator function to call
5268  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5269  */
5270 static inline void
ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u32 iter_flags,void (* iterator)(void * data,u8 * mac,struct ieee80211_vif * vif),void * data)5271 ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
5272 				    void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
5273 						     struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5274 				    void *data)
5275 {
5276 	ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
5277 				     iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
5278 				     iterator, data);
5279 }
5280 
5281 /**
5282  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
5283  *
5284  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5285  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5286  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5287  * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
5288  * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
5289  *
5290  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5291  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5292  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5293  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5294  */
5295 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5296 						u32 iter_flags,
5297 						void (*iterator)(void *data,
5298 						    u8 *mac,
5299 						    struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5300 						void *data);
5301 
5302 /**
5303  * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
5304  *
5305  * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5306  * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5307  * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5308  *
5309  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5310  * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5311  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5312  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5313  */
5314 void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5315 					      u32 iter_flags,
5316 					      void (*iterator)(void *data,
5317 						u8 *mac,
5318 						struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5319 					      void *data);
5320 
5321 /**
5322  * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5323  *
5324  * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5325  * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5326  * function for them.
5327  * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5328  *
5329  * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5330  * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5331  * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5332  */
5333 void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5334 				       void (*iterator)(void *data,
5335 						struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5336 				       void *data);
5337 /**
5338  * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5339  *
5340  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5341  * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5342  *
5343  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5344  * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5345  */
5346 void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5347 
5348 /**
5349  * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5350  *
5351  * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5352  * workqueue.
5353  *
5354  * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5355  * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5356  * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5357  */
5358 void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5359 				  struct delayed_work *dwork,
5360 				  unsigned long delay);
5361 
5362 /**
5363  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5364  * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5365  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5366  * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5367  *
5368  * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5369  *
5370  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5371  * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5372  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5373  */
5374 int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5375 				  u16 timeout);
5376 
5377 /**
5378  * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5379  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5380  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5381  * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5382  *
5383  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5384  * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5385  * from any context.
5386  */
5387 void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5388 				      u16 tid);
5389 
5390 /**
5391  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5392  * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5393  * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5394  *
5395  * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5396  *
5397  * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5398  * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5399  * will be managed by the mac80211.
5400  */
5401 int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5402 
5403 /**
5404  * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5405  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5406  * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5407  * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5408  *
5409  * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5410  * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5411  * can be called from any context.
5412  */
5413 void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5414 				     u16 tid);
5415 
5416 /**
5417  * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5418  *
5419  * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5420  * @addr: station's address
5421  *
5422  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5423  *
5424  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5425  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5426  */
5427 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5428 					 const u8 *addr);
5429 
5430 /**
5431  * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5432  *
5433  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5434  * @addr: remote station's address
5435  * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5436  *
5437  * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5438  *
5439  * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5440  * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5441  *
5442  * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5443  *      the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5444  *      We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5445  *      logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5446  *      BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5447  *      In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5448  *      is not reliable.
5449  *
5450  * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5451  */
5452 struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5453 					       const u8 *addr,
5454 					       const u8 *localaddr);
5455 
5456 /**
5457  * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5458  * @hw: the hardware
5459  * @pubsta: the station
5460  * @block: whether to block or unblock
5461  *
5462  * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5463  * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5464  * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5465  * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5466  * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5467  *
5468  * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5469  * manner.
5470  *
5471  * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5472  * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5473  * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5474  * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5475  * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5476  * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5477  * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5478  * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5479  * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5480  * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5481  * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5482  * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5483  * woke up while blocked or not.
5484  */
5485 void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5486 			       struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5487 
5488 /**
5489  * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5490  * @pubsta: the station
5491  *
5492  * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5493  * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5494  * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5495  * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5496  *
5497  * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5498  * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5499  * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5500  * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5501  *
5502  * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5503  *     driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5504  *     you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5505  *     and restore the _irqsafe version!
5506  */
5507 void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5508 
5509 /**
5510  * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5511  * @pubsta: the station
5512  * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5513  *
5514  * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5515  * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5516  * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5517  * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5518  * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5519  * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5520  * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5521  * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5522  * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5523  * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5524  * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5525  * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5526  * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5527  * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5528  */
5529 void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5530 
5531 /**
5532  * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
5533  *
5534  * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver can call
5535  * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
5536  * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
5537  * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
5538  *
5539  * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
5540  * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
5541  * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
5542  * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
5543  * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
5544  * attempts.
5545  *
5546  * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
5547  * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
5548  * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
5549  * them to 0.
5550  *
5551  * @pubsta: the station
5552  * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
5553  * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
5554  * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
5555  */
5556 void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5557 				    u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
5558 
5559 /**
5560  * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5561  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5562  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5563  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5564  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5565  *
5566  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5567  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5568  * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5569  * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5570  * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5571  * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5572  *
5573  * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5574  * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5575  * set_key callback.
5576  */
5577 void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5578 			 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5579 			 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5580 				      struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5581 				      struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5582 				      struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5583 				      void *data),
5584 			 void *iter_data);
5585 
5586 /**
5587  * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5588  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5589  * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5590  * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5591  * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5592  *
5593  * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5594  * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5595  * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5596  * in removal process will be skipped.
5597  *
5598  * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5599  * and thus iter must be atomic.
5600  */
5601 void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5602 			     struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5603 			     void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5604 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5605 					  struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5606 					  struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5607 					  void *data),
5608 			     void *iter_data);
5609 
5610 /**
5611  * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5612  * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5613  * @iter: iterator function
5614  * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5615  *
5616  * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5617  * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5618  * places while calling into the driver.
5619  *
5620  * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5621  * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5622  * removed.
5623  *
5624  * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5625  * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5626  * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5627  * or not.
5628  */
5629 void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5630 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5631 	void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5632 		     struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5633 		     void *data),
5634 	void *iter_data);
5635 
5636 /**
5637  * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5638  * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5639  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5640  *
5641  * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5642  * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5643  * information. This function must only be called from within the
5644  * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5645  * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5646  * %NULL.
5647  *
5648  * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5649  */
5650 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5651 					  struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5652 
5653 /**
5654  * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5655  *
5656  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5657  *
5658  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5659  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5660  * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5661  */
5662 void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5663 
5664 /**
5665  * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5666  *
5667  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5668  *
5669  * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5670  * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5671  * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5672  * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5673  * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5674  *
5675  * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5676  * without connection recovery attempts.
5677  */
5678 void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5679 
5680 /**
5681  * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5682  *
5683  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5684  *
5685  * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5686  * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5687  * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5688  * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5689  * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5690  *
5691  * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5692  * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5693  * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5694  * disconnect normally later.
5695  *
5696  * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5697  * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5698  * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5699  * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5700  */
5701 void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5702 
5703 /**
5704  * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5705  *	rssi threshold triggered
5706  *
5707  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5708  * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5709  * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5710  * @gfp: context flags
5711  *
5712  * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5713  * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5714  * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5715  */
5716 void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5717 			       enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5718 			       s32 rssi_level,
5719 			       gfp_t gfp);
5720 
5721 /**
5722  * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5723  *
5724  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5725  * @gfp: context flags
5726  */
5727 void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5728 
5729 /**
5730  * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5731  *
5732  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5733  */
5734 void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5735 
5736 /**
5737  * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5738  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5739  * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5740  *
5741  * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5742  * and wake up the suspended queues.
5743  */
5744 void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5745 
5746 /**
5747  * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5748  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5749  * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5750  *
5751  * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5752  * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5753  * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5754  */
5755 void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5756 			    enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5757 
5758 /**
5759  * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5760  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5761  */
5762 void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5763 
5764 /**
5765  * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5766  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5767  */
5768 void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5769 
5770 /**
5771  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5772  *
5773  * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5774  * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5775  * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5776  * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5777  * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5778  * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5779  *
5780  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5781  * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5782  * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5783  */
5784 void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5785 				  const u8 *addr);
5786 
5787 /**
5788  * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5789  * @pubsta: station struct
5790  * @tid: the session's TID
5791  * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5792  *	assumed to be out of the window after the call
5793  * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5794  * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5795  *
5796  * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5797  * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5798  * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5799  * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5800  */
5801 void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5802 					  u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5803 					  u16 received_mpdus);
5804 
5805 /**
5806  * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5807  *
5808  * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5809  * buffer.
5810  *
5811  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5812  * @ra: the peer's destination address
5813  * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5814  * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5815  */
5816 void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5817 
5818 /**
5819  * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5820  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5821  * @addr: station mac address
5822  * @tid: the rx tid
5823  */
5824 void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
5825 				 unsigned int tid);
5826 
5827 /**
5828  * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5829  *
5830  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5831  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5832  * reordering.
5833  *
5834  * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5835  * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5836  *
5837  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5838  * @addr: station mac address
5839  * @tid: the rx tid
5840  */
ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)5841 static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5842 						      const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5843 {
5844 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5845 		return;
5846 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5847 }
5848 
5849 /**
5850  * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5851  *
5852  * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5853  * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5854  * reordering.
5855  *
5856  * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5857  * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5858  *
5859  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5860  * @addr: station mac address
5861  * @tid: the rx tid
5862  */
ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif * vif,const u8 * addr,u16 tid)5863 static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5864 						     const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5865 {
5866 	if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5867 		return;
5868 	ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5869 }
5870 
5871 /**
5872  * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5873  *
5874  * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5875  * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5876  *
5877  * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5878  *
5879  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5880  * @addr: station mac address
5881  * @tid: the rx tid
5882  */
5883 void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5884 				   const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5885 
5886 /* Rate control API */
5887 
5888 /**
5889  * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
5890  *
5891  * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5892  * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5893  * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
5894  * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5895  *	to be filled in
5896  * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5897  *	which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5898  *	used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5899  * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5900  *	RTS threshold
5901  * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5902  *	if the selected rate supports it
5903  * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
5904  * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
5905  * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
5906  */
5907 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5908 	struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5909 	struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5910 	struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5911 	struct sk_buff *skb;
5912 	struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5913 	bool rts, short_preamble;
5914 	u32 rate_idx_mask;
5915 	u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
5916 	bool bss;
5917 };
5918 
5919 /**
5920  * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
5921  */
5922 enum rate_control_capabilities {
5923 	/**
5924 	 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
5925 	 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
5926 	 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
5927 	 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
5928 	 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
5929 	 */
5930 	RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
5931 };
5932 
5933 struct rate_control_ops {
5934 	unsigned long capa;
5935 	const char *name;
5936 	void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
5937 	void (*free)(void *priv);
5938 
5939 	void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5940 	void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5941 			  struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5942 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
5943 	void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5944 			    struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5945 			    struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5946 			    u32 changed);
5947 	void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5948 			 void *priv_sta);
5949 
5950 	void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
5951 			      struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5952 			      void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
5953 	void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5954 			  struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5955 			  struct sk_buff *skb);
5956 	void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5957 			 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5958 
5959 	void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5960 				struct dentry *dir);
5961 
5962 	u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
5963 };
5964 
rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta * sta,enum nl80211_band band,int index)5965 static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5966 				 enum nl80211_band band,
5967 				 int index)
5968 {
5969 	return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5970 }
5971 
5972 static inline s8
rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)5973 rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5974 		  struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5975 {
5976 	int i;
5977 
5978 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5979 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5980 			return i;
5981 
5982 	/* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
5983 	WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
5984 
5985 	/* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
5986 	return 0;
5987 }
5988 
5989 static inline
rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band * sband,struct ieee80211_sta * sta)5990 bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5991 			      struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5992 {
5993 	unsigned int i;
5994 
5995 	for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5996 		if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5997 			return true;
5998 	return false;
5999 }
6000 
6001 /**
6002  * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6003  *
6004  * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6005  * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6006  * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6007  * the most recent rate control module decision.
6008  *
6009  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6010  * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6011  * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6012  */
6013 int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6014 			   struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6015 			   struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6016 
6017 int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6018 void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6019 
6020 static inline bool
conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6021 conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6022 {
6023 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6024 }
6025 
6026 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6027 conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6028 {
6029 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6030 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6031 }
6032 
6033 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6034 conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6035 {
6036 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6037 	       conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
6038 }
6039 
6040 static inline bool
conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6041 conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6042 {
6043 	return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
6044 }
6045 
6046 static inline bool
conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf * conf)6047 conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6048 {
6049 	return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
6050 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
6051 		(conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
6052 }
6053 
6054 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type,bool p2p)6055 ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
6056 {
6057 	if (p2p) {
6058 		switch (type) {
6059 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
6060 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
6061 		case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
6062 			return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
6063 		default:
6064 			break;
6065 		}
6066 	}
6067 	return type;
6068 }
6069 
6070 static inline enum nl80211_iftype
ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif * vif)6071 ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
6072 {
6073 	return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
6074 }
6075 
6076 /**
6077  * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
6078  *
6079  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6080  * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
6081  * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
6082  *
6083  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
6084  * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
6085  * matching GroupId management frame.
6086  * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
6087  */
6088 void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6089 				const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
6090 
6091 void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6092 				   int rssi_min_thold,
6093 				   int rssi_max_thold);
6094 
6095 void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6096 
6097 /**
6098  * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
6099  *
6100  * @vif: the specified virtual interface
6101  *
6102  * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
6103  *
6104  * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
6105  * applicable.
6106  */
6107 int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6108 
6109 /**
6110  * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
6111  * @vif: virtual interface
6112  * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
6113  * @gfp: allocation flags
6114  *
6115  * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
6116  */
6117 void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6118 				    struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
6119 				    gfp_t gfp);
6120 
6121 /**
6122  * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
6123  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6124  * @vif: virtual interface
6125  * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
6126  * @band: the band to transmit on
6127  * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
6128  *
6129  * Note: must be called under RCU lock
6130  */
6131 bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6132 			      struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
6133 			      int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
6134 
6135 /**
6136  * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
6137  *
6138  * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
6139  * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
6140  *
6141  * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
6142  *
6143  * private:
6144  *
6145  * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
6146  * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
6147  */
6148 struct ieee80211_noa_data {
6149 	u32 next_tsf;
6150 	bool has_next_tsf;
6151 
6152 	u8 absent;
6153 
6154 	u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6155 	struct {
6156 		u32 start;
6157 		u32 duration;
6158 		u32 interval;
6159 	} desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
6160 };
6161 
6162 /**
6163  * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
6164  *
6165  * @attr: P2P NoA IE
6166  * @data: NoA tracking data
6167  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6168  *
6169  * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
6170  */
6171 int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
6172 			    struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6173 
6174 /**
6175  * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
6176  *
6177  * @data: NoA tracking data
6178  * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
6179  */
6180 void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
6181 
6182 /**
6183  * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
6184  * @vif: virtual interface
6185  * @peer: the peer's destination address
6186  * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
6187  * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
6188  * @gfp: allocation flags
6189  *
6190  * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
6191  */
6192 void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
6193 				 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
6194 				 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
6195 
6196 /**
6197  * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
6198  *
6199  * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
6200  * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
6201  * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
6202  * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
6203  * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
6204  * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
6205  *
6206  * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
6207  * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
6208  * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6209  *
6210  * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
6211  * @tid: the TID to reserve
6212  *
6213  * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
6214  */
6215 int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6216 
6217 /**
6218  * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
6219  *
6220  * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
6221  * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
6222  * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
6223  *
6224  * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
6225  * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
6226  * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
6227  *
6228  * @sta: the station
6229  * @tid: the TID to unreserve
6230  */
6231 void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
6232 
6233 /**
6234  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6235  *
6236  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6237  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6238  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6239  *
6240  * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
6241  *
6242  * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
6243  * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
6244  * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by by RCU and thus the
6245  * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
6246  * but for the duration of the frame handling.
6247  * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
6248  * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
6249  *
6250  * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
6251  * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
6252  */
6253 struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6254 				     struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6255 
6256 /**
6257  * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
6258  * (in process context)
6259  *
6260  * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
6261  * (internally disables bottom halves).
6262  *
6263  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6264  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
6265  *	ieee80211_next_txq()
6266  */
ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)6267 static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6268 						      struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6269 {
6270 	struct sk_buff *skb;
6271 
6272 	local_bh_disable();
6273 	skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
6274 	local_bh_enable();
6275 
6276 	return skb;
6277 }
6278 
6279 /**
6280  * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
6281  *
6282  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6283  * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
6284  *
6285  * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
6286  * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
6287  * driver has finished scheduling it.
6288  */
6289 struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6290 
6291 /**
6292  * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
6293  *
6294  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6295  * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
6296  *
6297  * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
6298  * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
6299  */
6300 void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
6301 
6302 /* (deprecated) */
ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,u8 ac)6303 static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
6304 {
6305 }
6306 
6307 void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6308 			      struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
6309 
6310 /**
6311  * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
6312  *
6313  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6314  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6315  *
6316  * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
6317  * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
6318  *
6319  * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
6320  * this TXQ internally.
6321  */
6322 static inline void
ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq)6323 ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
6324 {
6325 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
6326 }
6327 
6328 /**
6329  * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
6330  *
6331  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6332  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6333  * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
6334  *
6335  * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
6336  * internally.
6337  */
6338 static inline void
ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw * hw,struct ieee80211_txq * txq,bool force)6339 ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6340 		     bool force)
6341 {
6342 	__ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
6343 }
6344 
6345 /**
6346  * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
6347  *
6348  * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
6349  * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
6350  * fairness accounting without going using the scheduling order enfored by
6351  * next_txq().
6352  *
6353  * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
6354  * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
6355  * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
6356  * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
6357  * again.
6358  *
6359  * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
6360  * aligned aginst driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
6361  * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
6362  * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
6363  * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
6364  * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
6365  *
6366  * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6367  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6368  */
6369 bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6370 				struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6371 
6372 /**
6373  * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
6374  *
6375  * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
6376  * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
6377  * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
6378  *
6379  * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6380  * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
6381  * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
6382  */
6383 void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
6384 			     unsigned long *frame_cnt,
6385 			     unsigned long *byte_cnt);
6386 
6387 /**
6388  * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
6389  *
6390  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
6391  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6392  *
6393  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6394  * @inst_id: the local instance id
6395  * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
6396  * @gfp: allocation flags
6397  */
6398 void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6399 				   u8 inst_id,
6400 				   enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
6401 				   gfp_t gfp);
6402 
6403 /**
6404  * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
6405  *
6406  * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
6407  * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
6408  * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
6409  *
6410  * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6411  * @match: match event information
6412  * @gfp: allocation flags
6413  */
6414 void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6415 			      struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
6416 			      gfp_t gfp);
6417 
6418 #endif /* MAC80211_H */
6419